Home

Husqvarna 500RTT Tiller User Manual

1. T InstallAnywhere by Zero G 8 Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM or click Choose to select a storage path ATTENTION If Device Manager is already installed on your computer you must choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version 9 Click Next The Pre Installation Summary dialog box appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 117 Pre Installation Summary dialog box Java Device Manager Pre Installation Summary Please Review the Following Before Continuing Product Name Java Device Manager i Install Folder Choose Link Folder fhome admin JDM Pre installation Summary R B installing Link Folder r neni roaa tmp install dir 2454 Do_Not_install Disk Space Information for Installation Target Required 177 641 424 bytes Available 15 475 097 600 bytes 10 Verify the folder and disk space required to install the software If necessary click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes 11 Click Install The installation process begins Installing Java Device Manager dialog box Java Device Manager Choos Choose Install Folder Choose Link Folder Pre installation Summary Installing 5 E instali
2. no clock summer time The no clock summer time command disables the daylight savings time feature The syntax for the no clock summer time command is no clock summer time The no clock summer time command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no clock time zone command has no parameters or variables show clock time zone The show clock time zone command displays the local time zone settings The syntax for the show clock time zone command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling Autopology 215 I CSS show clock time zone The show clock time zone command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The show clock time zone command has no parameters or variables Figure 74 show clock time zone output page 215 displays sample output from the show clock time zone command Figure 74 show clock time zone output 2526T lt config gt show clock time zone Time Zone offset from UTC is 66 06 2526T lt config gt show clock summer time The show clock summer time command displays the daylight savings time settings The syntax for the show clock summer time command is show clock summer time The show clock summer time command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The show clock summer time command has no parameters or
3. Parameters and variables Description off Sets the LEDs to stop blinking time lt 1 10 gt Indicates the duration in minutes for the LEDs to blink in order to identify the unit Upgrading software You can download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software image that is located in nonvolatile flash memory To download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software image a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server must be present in your network and the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address To learn how to configure the switch IP address see Assigning and clearing IP addresses page 178 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 230 System configuration using the CLI CAUTION Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image This section contains information about the following e download command page 230 download command The download command upgrades the software for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series You can upgrade both the software image and the diagnostics image ATTENTION The system resets after downloading a new image The syntax for the download command is download address lt ip gt image lt image name
4. Flow Control 1 Enabled Displays current settings of flow control 2 Symmetric 3 Asymmetric End Downloading switch images You can download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software image to nonvolatile flash memory To download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software image a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server must be present in your network and the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address To learn how to configure the switch IP address see ip address commana page 178 CAUTION Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image To download a switch image use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Software Download The Software Download page appears Figure 122 Software Download page Configuration gt Software Download Software Download Setting Current Running Version v4 0 0 029 Local Store Version 4 0 0 029 Software Image Filename platypus_400s img Diagnostics Image Filename siz TFTP Server IP Address 192 167 120 13 poceiecsccseg Start TFTP Load of New Image No CS Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Downloading switch images 329
5. Graph dialog box appears 192 168 249 46 LLDP Port 1 1 xi TLYsUnrecognizedTotal Bam eals Clear Counters close Help Poll Interval fios oday 00h 00m 20s 3 Highlight a data column to graph 4 Click one of the graph buttons End Local System tab With the Local System tab you can view LLDP properties for the local system Use the following procedure to open the Local System tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Select Local System The Local System tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 292 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 104 Local System tab C S921 ATO Gobslc Port TX Stats RX Stats Local System Local Port Local Management Neighbor Neighbor Mgmt Address Uninoen TLV Organizations Defined Info ussisldSubtype mashes Chassisid 00 19 69 08 00 Systeme Sy ex Ethemet Routing Satch 25T TOA PWiL D O12 Mert t 0 059 SysCapSupperted tndkge SysCapEnabled bridge The following table describes the Local System tab fields Table 132 Local System tab fields Field Description ChassisldSubtype the type of encoding used to identify the local system c
6. System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 124 Getting Started with Device Manager e Press Ctrl O The Open Device dialog box appears Figure 32 Open Device dialog box Device Manager 609b07 Open Device Device Name 192 167 120 28 SNMP v1 SNMPyv2c Read Community 1t Write Community peer J Use default community strings in properties SNMP 3 v3 Enabled Ping Telnet Close The following table describes the Open Device dialog box fields Table 19 Open Device dialog box fields Description Device Name Either an IP address or a DNS name for the device entered by the user SNMPv1 Read Communi SNMP read community string for the SNMPv2 ty device Default is public displayed as c The entry is case sensitive Write Communi SNMP write community string for the ty device Default is private displayed as The entry is case sensitive Use default When selected the Device Manager uses community the default community string Set the strings in default community strings in Device gt properties Properties Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Opening a device 125 I _ lt _ _ _ _ SLL ee Field Description SNMPv3 v3 Enabled When
7. disabled Skips the agent banner display lt 1 19 gt LINE Fills the Nth line of the custom banner 1 lt N lt 19 with the text specified in LINE show banner command The show banner command displays the banner The syntax for the show banner command is show banner custom static The show banner command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 66 show banner command parameters and variables page 201 describes the parameters for the banner command Table 66 show banner command parameters and variables Parameters Description static Displays default banner custom Displays custom banner if empty Displays static custom or disabled status if parameter is not entered Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 202 System configuration using the CLI no banner command The no banner command lets you clear all lines of a previously stored custom banner The syntax for the no banner command is no banner The no banner command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Displaying the ARP table The show arp table command displays the arp table of the device The syntax for the show arp table command is show arp table The show arp table command is executed in the User Exec command mode The show arp table command has no parame
8. poe poe pd detect type 802dot3af 802dot3af and legacy Unit The poe poe pd detect type command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ATTENTION You must ensure that this setting is the correct one for the IP appliance you use with the switch Please note this setting applies to the entire switch not port by port So you must ensure that this setting is configured correctly for all the IP appliances on a specified switch describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe pd detect type command Table 34 poe poe pd detect type command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p 802dot3af 802dot3af_and _legacy Sets the detection method the switch use to detect power needs of devices connected to front ports 802dot3af 802dot3af_and_legacy ATTENTION The default setting is 802dot8af Ensure that the power detection method you choose for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR matches that used by the IP devices you are powering Set the unit in stack to apply the detection method poe poe power usage threshold command The poe poe power usage threshold command lets you set a percentage usage threshold above which the system sends a trap for each Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR The syntax for the poe poe power usage threshold command is poe poe power usage threshold lt 1 99 gt Unit The poe poe power usage threshold command is executed in
9. Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 823162 B Document status Standard Document version 02 02 Document date 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Sourced in Canada India and the United States of America The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license The software license agreement is included in this document Trademarks Nortel Nortel Networks the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Trademarks are acknowledged with an asterisk at their first appearance in the document All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted rights legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictio
10. RtoAlgorithm The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets RtoMin The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout measured in milliseconds RtoMax The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout measured in milliseconds MaxConn The limit on the total number of TCP connections that the entity can support In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic this object contains the value 1 End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 Viewing switch IP information 257 TCP Connections tab The TCP Connections tab displays information on the current TCP connections the switch maintains To open the TCP Connections tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the TCP Connections tab The TCP Connections tab appears xi waj jajaa The following table describes the TCP Connections tab fields TCP Connections tab fields Field Description LocalAddress The local IP address for this TCP connection In the case of a connection in the listen state which is willing to accept connections for any IP i
11. aging time address lt H H H gt port lt LINE gt include exclude lt pattern gt show mac security config mac address table address lt macaddrs gt port security lists mac da filter show mtt utilization lt 1 6 gt show password aging time day security show poe main status show poe port status show mac address table command page 98 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show poe main status command page 164 show poe port status command page 165 show poe power measurement show port mirroring show port statistics port lt portlist gt show gos egressmap ds lt 0 63 gt show qos egressmap status show poe power measurement command page 166 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration Quality of Service NN47215 504 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration Quality of Service NN47215 504 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview
12. mA Watt low 00 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 mim sis oj o o 1 st a 4 4 Q 4 oo O O O OOOOOOOQ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 le Detecting m gt pa 2 4 ed Detecting i 3 4 led Detecting 4 ed 7 Detecting ed Detecting ag a 4 led Detecting oon OONA WN led Detecting ag ed Detecting g 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 ed 7 Detecting 0 0 0 0 ed 7 Detecting 0 0 mi m mi mim mf m m FE TEN sls s EA 2 o o o o o o o o oj o o oc so cS ol y 4 led Detecting aia il i i ill i il 4 2 4 Switch Enabled r Ports 13 24 The following table describes the items on the Port Property page Table 43 Port Property page items Admin Status Choose to enable or disable power on the selected port The default value is Enabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring PoE using web based management 171 Item Description Current Status Displays the status of the PoE feature It displays Disabled detecting function is disabled Searching detecting function is enabled and the system is searching for a valid powered device on this port Delivering power detection found
13. 1000 ful1 asymm pause frame pause frame none The auto negotiation advertisements command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 106 auto negotiation advertisements commana page 246 describes the parameters and variables for the auto negotiation advertisements command Table 106 auto negotiation advertisements command Parameters and values Description port lt portlist gt Enter ports for which you want to configure advertisements Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA 247 Parameters and values Description 10 full 10 half These are speed duplex pause settings Any 100 full 100 half combination of these settings is allowed but 1000 full parameters must be given in the order shown asymm pause frame pause frame none Do not advertise any settings during auto negotiation no auto negotiation advertisements command The no auto negotiation advertisements command clears all advertisements for the switch This command is used for testing The syntax forthe no auto negotiation advertisements command is no auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt ATTENTION The use of this command affects traffic and brings down the link The no auto negotiation advertise
14. 2556T PWR gt There is no default value for this command ip name server command The ip name server command adds one or more DNS servers IP addresses The syntax for the ip name server command is ip name server lt A B C D gt The ip name server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ATTENTION You can add up to three servers adding one at a time Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Using DNS to ping and telnet 187 Table 53 ip name server command parameters and variables page 187 describes the parameters and variables for the ip name server command Table 53 ip name server command parameters and variables Parameters and variables lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of a DNS server Description The default value is 0 0 0 0 no ip name server command The no ip name server command removes one or more DNS servers IP addresses The syntax forthe no ip name server command is no ip name server lt A B C D gt The no ip name server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 54 no ip name server command parameters and variables page 187 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip name server command Table 54 no ip name server command parameters and variables Parameters and ar Descr
15. 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Working with statistics and graphs 137 Figure 42 Pie graph Z 10 10 40 26 Port 1 1 Interface AbsoluteValue ojx 86 InOctets E 12 OutOctets Y 0 InUcastPkts E0 OutUcastPkts 1 InNUcastPkts E 0 OutNUcastPkts 0 InDiscards Eo OutDiscards 0 InErrors 0 OutErrors e Statistics for single and multiple objects page 137 e Viewing statistics as graphs page 138 Statistics for single and multiple objects Statistics for a selected object or objects are displayed in the statistics dialog box The dialog box for a single object shows all six types of statistics for each counter Figure 43 Interface statistics for a single port x E 0 0 InOctets 0 OutOctets 0 InUcastPkts OutUcastPkts InNUcastPkts Oo J J OOO 9 9 0 S S ol o BA 8 Ch GI cea counters close Help Pot intervat 10s 0 day 00h 00m 10s Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 138 Getting Started with Device Manager The statistics dialog box for multiple objects shows a single type of statistics for the selected objects For example Figure 44 Interface statistics for multiple ports page 138 shows LastValue statistics for the selected ports Figure 4
16. ARP tab 255 ASCII Config file dialog box 273 ASCII configuration file 74 ASCII Configuration File Download page 330 ASClIConfigAutodldStatus field 274 ASClIConfigAutoDownload field 274 ASClIConfigFileName field 274 ASClIConfigManualdldStatus field 274 274 ASClIConfigManualDownload field 274 274 AUR 54 configuring with Device Manager 63 configuring with the CLI 61 Authentication Password 125 Authentication Protocol 125 AuthenticationTraps field 260 Auto Unit Replacement 54 auto negotiation advertisements command 246 AutoNegotiate field 306 310 autonegotiation 202 237 description 77 modes 339 troubleshooting 339 AutoNegotiationAdvertisments field 307 310 AutoNegotiationCapability field 307 310 AutoPVID field 260 autosave enabling and disabling 333 Autosave Configuration screen 68 autosave enable command 207 autosense description 77 Autotopology 74 autotopology command 216 AutoUnitReplacementEnabled 260 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 380 Index Available DTE Power field 168 available power 173 Average statistics 134 B banner command for displaying banner 20 Banner display control 200 Banner tab 269 Bar Chart button 140 Base Unit Info tab 261 Base Unit Info Tab 262 BaseNumPorts field 265 BcastAddr field 255 BkplType field 281 blinking LEDs 130 boot command 196
17. Boot Mode Setting field 320 booting the switch 196 BootMode field 261 BootP 181 196 Always mode 71 BOOTPTAB TXT file 351 Bootstrap Protocol choosing a request mode 70 Disabled 72 Last Address setting 72 modes 196 sample configuration file 351 When Needed mode 71 bootP configuring 319 request modes 320 BootRouterAddr tab 266 Broadcast Rate Limiting 79 buttons dialog boxes 133 toolbar 127 C chassis configuration editing 258 ChassisType field 281 check boxes about 150 CLI 86 CLI command list alphabetical 353 clock summer time command 213 clock time zone command 213 color coded ports 130 command modes 82 91 91 communication parameters setting for Device Manager 120 community strings default for Device Manager 123 entering 124 ConfigFileName field 272 configuration downloading 272 PoE by port 175 PoE switch parameters 172 Configuration File Download Upload page 332 Configuration File Download Upload screen 73 configure command 91 configure network command 189 Configuring PoE 157 Configuring PoE 157 configuring PoE 168 Confirm row deletion field 122 connectivity 185 connectors 341 DB 9 console comm port connector 341 Console port default settings 66 console comm port illustration 341 pin assignments Console Communication Port page 334 ConsumptionPower field 173 Context Name 125 conventions text 17 Copy button 133 copy config nvram command 205 copy config tftp command 199 copy
18. Figure 47 Menu Access RW gt Summary gt Confkuratlon gt Fault gt Statistics gt Applications VY Admintstration System Information Quick Start gt Securtty 7 Logout 7 Reset 7 Reset To Default gt Support To navigate the web based management interface menu click a menu title and then click one of its options When you click an option the corresponding page appears The first six headings provide options for viewing and configuring switch parameters The Support heading provides options to open the online Help file and the Nortel Web site Table 30 Main headings and options page 147 lists the main headings in the Web based management interface and their associated options Table 30 Main headings and options Summary Stack Information Switch Information Identify Unit Numbers Stack Numbering Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 148 Using the Web based management interface Main menu titles Configuration IP System Remote Access SNMPv1 SNMPv3 SNMP Trap MAC Address Find MAC Address Port Management High Speed Flow Control Software Download License Download ASCII Config Download Configuration File Console Comm Port Fault RMON Threshold RMON Event Log System Log Statistics Port Port Error Summary Interface Ethernet Errors Transparent Brid
19. If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem the value is zero AdminState Administrative state of the switch Select either enable or reset ATTENTION In a stack configuration Reset only resets the base unit OperState The operational state of the switch Location Type the physical location of the switch RelPos The relative position of the switch Nortel iip aleei Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 263 Field Description BaseNumPorts The number of base ports of the switch TotalNumPorts The number of ports of the switch IPAddress The base unit IP address Stack Info tab Like the Base Unit Info tab the Stack Info tab provides read only information about the operating status of the stacked switches and whether or not the default factory settings are being used To open the Stack Info tab Step Action 1 Open the Edit Chassis screen in the manner detailed at the beginning of this section 2 Click the Stack Info tab This tab is illustrated in Edit Chassis screen Stack Info tab page 263 Edit Chassis screen Stack Info tab Salen Bee Ue Le Wee ats Aged RET Teus Doce vate WenS Fur Buenas Sudan Boe wt ie MDAC MAS Daa ape Eruh Nur ler eae wham emen
20. Nortel Networks Device Manager window 127 Menu bar Use the menu bar to set up and operate the Device Manager Table 20 Menu bar commands page 127 describes the Menu Bar commands Table 20 Menu bar commands Command Description Device Opens the Open Device dialog box You can also e Set the Properties used during a Device Manager session e Refresh the status of the currently viewed device e Rediscover device e Telnet to a device e Open an SSH connection to a device e View SNMP traps that the Device Manager receives e View Syslogs e View SNMP trace logs Edit Opens the edit dialog boxes for selected objects in the device view This command opens dialog boxes for managing files running diagnostic tests and configuring data for selected objects This command also lets you set security parameters SNTP and SNMP v3 related configurations Graph Opens statistics and graphing dialog boxes for the selected object VLAN Opens dialog boxes for managing VLANs Spanning Tree Group STG RSTP MSTP Multi Link Trunks and Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP QoS Opens configuration dialog boxes for Quality of Service QoS and DSCP RMON Opens RMON configuration and monitoring dialog boxes Actions Provides quick access to the Web Management Software Home page Help Opens online Help topics for Device Manager and provides a legend for the port colors in the device view Toolbar The toolbar contain
21. Status Interval Hotswap Detect every Enable Http Port Application launch with ring tone Save SNMPv3 Devices to Open Last A dialog box displays when checked before deleting a row Specifies the default read community Specifies the default write community Interval at which status information is gathered default is 20 seconds The interval at which Device Manager detects the module information The default is 1 interval Enables true or disables false periodic polling of the device for updated status If polling is disabled the chassis status is updated only when you click Refresh on the Chassis tab Default port is 80 This field specifies the HTTP port for the application To access the Device Home Page using the Web ensure that the HTTP Port attribute matches the switch configuration If you change the port number the system prompts you with a warning message Enabled by default you can modify this field only when configuring the Device Manager default properties You cannot modify this field when configuring the per device properties Disabled by default if you enable this field you are prompted with a security warning message because any user can access the device without entering the SNMPv38 security criteria if this feature is enabled You can modify this field only when configuring the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 1
22. The default 1lldp tx tlv command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 83 default Ildp tx tlv command parameters and variables page 222 describes the parameters and variables for the default Ildp tx tlv command Table 83 default Iildp tx tlv command parameters and variables Parameters and variables port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr port desc sys cap sys desc sys name Description Specifies the ports affected by the command Local management address TLV default value is false not included Port description TLV default value is false not included System capabilities TLV default value is false not included System description TLV default value is false not included System name TLV default value is false not included lidp status command The lldp status command sets the LLDPU transmit and receive status on ports The syntax for the 1ldp status command is lldp port lt portlist gt status rxOnly txAndRx txOnly Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using the CLI 223 The 1ldp status command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 84 Ildp status command parameters and variables page 223 describes the parameters and variables for the Ildp status command Table 84 Ildp sta
23. The following table describes the Agent tab fields Table 119 Agent tab fields Field Description NextBootlpAddr The IP address to be used the next time the switch is booted NextBootNetMask The subnet mask to be used the next time the switch is booted LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the configuration file and or the image file If not used then the value is 0 0 0 0 ImageFileName Name of the image file s currently associated with the interface When the object is not used the value is a zero length string ValidFlag Indicates if the configuration and or image file s were downloaded from this interface and if the file names have not been changed BootRouterAddr The IP address of the boot router for the configuration file and or the image file MacAddr The MAC address of the switch Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 267 PowerSupply tab The PowerSupply tab provides read only information about the operating status of the switch power supplies To open the PowerSupply tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit gt Chassis The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed 3 Click the PowerSupply tab The PowerSupply tab appears Ed
24. The syntax for this command is show stack auto unit replacement The stack auto unit replacement enable command is in all command modes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 62 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking There are no parameters or variables for the show stack auto unit replacement command stack auto unit replacement enable command The stack auto unit replacement enable command enables AUR on the switch The syntax for this command is stack auto unit replacement enable The stack auto unit replacement enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode There are no parameters or variables for the stack auto unit replacement enable command no stack auto unit replacement enable command The no stack auto unit replacement enable command disables AUR on the switch The syntax for this command is no stack auto unit replacement enable The no stack auto unit replacement enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode There are no parameters or variables for the no stack auto unit replacement enable command default stack auto unit replacement enable command The default stack auto unit replacement enable command restores the default AUR settings The syntax for this command is default stack auto unit replacement enable The defaul
25. This field is updated only when the screen is redisplayed System Name Type a character string to create a name to identify the switch for example Finance Group System Location Type a character string to create a name for the switch location for example First Floor System Contact Type a character string to create the contact information for the network manager or the selected person to contact regarding switch operation for example mcarlson company com ATTENTION To operate correctly with the Web interface the system contact should be an e mail address 2 Type information in the text boxes 3 Click Submit End Configuring switch port status You can use the Port Management page to configure a specific switch port or all switch ports to autonegotiate for the highest available speed of the connected station or you can set the speed for selected switch ports ATTENTION Autonegotiation is not supported on 1000 Mb s fiber optic ports You can disable switch ports that are trunk members if you choose to disable them one by one If you choose to disable all ports of the unit or stack the changes cannot have effect on the ports belonging to MLTs Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring switch port status 325 ATTENTION The Autonegotiation Spe
26. asymmetric enables the local port to perform flow control on the remote port e symmetric enables the local port to perform flow control e auto sets the port to automatically determine the flow control mode default e disable disables flow control on the port no flowcontrol command The no flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and disables flow control The syntax for the no flowcontrol command is no flowcontrol port lt portlist gt The no flowcontrol command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 101 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables page 242 describes the parameters and variables for the no flowcontrol command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 242 Ethernet port management using the CLI Table 101 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to disable flow control ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command default flowcontrol command The default flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and sets the flow control to auto which automatically detects the flow control The syntax for the def
27. default ip domain name The default ip domain name command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default ip domain name command has no parameters or variables Configuration Management This section covers the following topics e Automatically loading Configuration file page 188 e ASCII Configuration Generator page 191 Automatically loading Configuration file This section discusses how to download a configuration file when the system boots You use standard CLI commands to modify the configuration file you want to download This section contains information about the following commands e configure network command page 189 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuration Management 189 e show config network command page 190 configure network command The configure network command lets you load and execute a script immediately and to configure parameters to automatically download a configuration file when you reboot the switch The syntax for the configure network command is configure network load on boot disable use bootp use config filename lt WORD gt address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt The configure network command is executed in the User Exec mode ATTENTION When you enter configure network with no parameters the system prompts you
28. e Quick Start page 312 e Configuring system security page 314 e Rebooting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series page 315 e Changing the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to system defaults page 316 Logging out of the management interface page 316 Viewing system information You can view an image of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series information about the host device and if provided the contact person or manager for the switch The System Information page is also the web based management interface home page To view system information use the following procedure From the main menu choose Administration gt System Information The System Information page appears ATTENTION You may create or modify existing system information parameters using the System page For more information on configuring system information see Modifying system settings page 322 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 312 Administering the switch using web based management Figure 112 System Information page NORTEL Administration gt System Information Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T Arcis Gm Eth R Switch 25267 HW 0A FW 1 0 0 12 gt Su emnet Routing Swit gt Configuration sysDescription v4 1 0 059 BN 59 c Nortel Networks sysUpTime 14 Hours 13 Minutes 22 Seconds
29. loading and executing a script immediately interface command The interface command moves you to the Interface Configuration config if command mode The syntax for the interface command is interface FastEthernet lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 92 CLI Basics The interface command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 12 interface command parameters and variables page 92 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command Table 12 interface command parameters and variables Parameters oie Description and variables lt portlist gt Specifies the portlist you want to be affected by all the commands issued in the config if command mode disable command The disable command returns you to the User EXEC exec command mode The syntax for the disable command is disable The disable command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The disable command has no parameters or variables end command The end command moves you to the priv Exec mode from either the Global Configuration config mode or the Interface Configuration config if mode The syntax for the end command is end The end command has no parameters or variables exit command The exit command moves you around the command modes e
30. lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hh mm gt lt offset gt clock time zone lt zone gt lt hours gt lt minutes gt configure terminal network clock summer time page 213 clock time zone page 213 configure command page 91 configure network load on boot disable use bootp use config configure network filename lt FILENAME gt configure network address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt configure command copy config nvram copy config tftp address lt KXX XXX XXX XXX gt filename lt WORD gt copy tftp config address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt filename lt WORD gt copy running config tftp lt IP Address gt lt filename gt default auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt default autotopology default autosave enable default command default duplex port lt portlist gt default eapol guest vlan Configuration Management page 188 configure command page 91 copy config nvram command page 205 copy config tftp command page 199 copy tftp config command page 200 copy running config tftp command page 192 default auto negotiation advertisements commana page 247 default autotopology commana page 216 default autosave enable commana page 207 default command page 90 default duplex commana page 239 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 default flowcont
31. snmp server authentication trap enable disable snmp server bootstrap lt minimum secure gt lt semi secure gt lt very secure gt snmp server community lt community string gt ro rw snmp server community lt community string gt read view lt view name gt write view lt view name gt notify view lt view name gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration IP Multicast NN47215 503 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 shutdown command page 94 shutdown command for the port page 233 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 snmp server contact lt text gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 370 Appe
32. you require a TFTP server to upload an ASCII configuration file to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series But with this feature the requirement of a TFTP server is eliminated This feature lets you upload an ASCII configuration file using the HTTP protocol To download the ASCII configuration file to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Ascii Config Download 2 The Ascii Configuration File Download page appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server 331 Figure 123 Ascii Configuration file download page Configuration gt Ascii Configuration File Download Ascii Configuration File Download Setting Ascii Configuration File itipk1 10 nt doc Current Projects Browse Last Manual Configuration Status Passed End The following table describes the items displayed on the ASCII Configuration File Download page Table 148 Ascii Configuration file download page items Item Ascii Configuration File Description personal computer Lets you select the ASCII config file located on a Status Submit Last Manual Configuration Displays the status of the download file from the personal computer to the Ethernet Routing
33. 100 half 1000 full auto negotiation advertisements commana page 246 asymm pause frame pause frame none auto pvid Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 autotopology command page 216 autotopology autosave enable autosave enable commana page 207 banner custom static disabled lt 1 19 gt LINE i banner command for displaying banner page 201 blink leds off time lt 1 10 gt boot default Configuring LEDs to blink on the display panel page 229 boot command page 196 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series clear logging nv nonvolatile volatile Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 clear stats port lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 354 Appendix D Command List Command cli password read only read write lt WORD gt cli password serial telnet none local radius Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 clock summer time lt zone gt date lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hh mms gt
34. 192 show running config command This command displays the current configuration of switch as a series of CLI commands This command must be executed in the configuration mode and has no parameters or variables The syntax of this command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 192 System configuration using the CLI show running config Figure 62 show running config command output page 192 shows the output of the show running config command Figure 62 show running config command output 255 T PWRH show running conf ig t Embedded ASCII Configuration Generator Script t Model Ethernet Routing Switch 255 6T PWR t Software version v4 1 0 053 enable conf igure terminal see CORE 20 autosave enable mac address table aging time 306 autotopology no radius server padius server host 0 0 0 0 radius server secondary host 6 6 6 6 radius server port 1812 t radius server key eonan radius server timeout 2 telnet access login timeout 1 telnet access retry 3 telnet access inactive timeout 15 telnet access logging all cli password switch serial none More q Quit space return Cont inue gt copy running config tftp command This command copies contents of the current configuration file to another file on the TFTP server The syntax of the co
35. 1ldp port command is show lldp port lt portlist gt neighbor neighbor mgmt addr rx stats tx stats tx tlv The show lldp port command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 88 show lldp port command parameters and variables page 226 describes the parameters and variables for the show Ildp port command Table 88 show Ildp port command parameters and variables ae es ane Description port lt portlist gt Specifies the ports affected by the command neighbor Displays LLDP neighbors neighbor mgmt addr Displays LLDP management addresses for neighbors rx stats Displays LLDP receive statistics tx stats Displays LLDP transmit statistics tx tlv Displays LLDP transmit TLVs Figure 81 show Ildp port neighbor command output page 227 displays the output from the show Ildp port neighbor command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using the CLI 227 Figure 81 show Ildp port neighbor command output 526T show lldp neighbor ys capability O0 Other R Repeater B Bridge W WLAN accesspoint r Router one D DOCSIS cable device S Station only Figure 82 show Ildp port neighbor mgmt addr command output page 227 displays the output from the show Ildp port neighbor mgmt addr command Figure 82 show Ildp port neighbor mgmt addr com
36. 2007 Nortel Networks 02 02 Standard Configuring high speed flow control 327 End Configuring high speed flow control You can view the High Speed Flow Control parameters for Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series in this page To configure high speed flow control use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt High Speed Flow Control The High Speed Flow Control page appears Figure 121 High Speed Flow Control page Configuration gt High Speed Flow Control High Speed Flow Control Setting Port Autonegotiation Speed Duplex Flow Control 49 Enabled 1000Mbs Full 50 Enabled 1000Mbs Full 51 Enabled 1000Mbs Full Symmetric 52 Enabled 1000Mbs Full Symmetric The following table describes the items on the High Speed Flow Control page Table 145 High Speed Flow Control page items Item Range Description Port The switch port number of the corresponding row Autonegotiation 1 Enabled Displays if the autonegotiation feature is enabled or 2 Disabled disabled When enabled the port advertises support only for 1000Mb s operation in full duplex mode Nortel rb aleei Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 328 Configuring the switch using web based management Item Range Description Speed Duplex 100MBS Full XXXXXX
37. 5 1000Mbs Full Displays the name or alias you assigned the port To assign or change the name enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters The trunk group that the switch port belongs to as specified in the Trunk Member fields on the MultiLink Trunk page Choose to enable or disable the port You can also use this field to control access to any switch port The default setting is Enabled The current link state of the corresponding port as follows Up The port is connected and operational Down The port is not connected or is not operational Choose to control whether link up down traps are sent to the configured trap receiver from the switch The default setting is On Choose to enable or disable the autonegotiation feature Choosing to enable autonegotiation sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided by the connected station up to 100Mb s in full duplex mode ATTENTION Autonegotiation also enables auto sensing on 10 100 ports The default setting is Enabled Lets you manually configure any port to support a specific Ethernet speed and duplex setting The default setting is 10 Mbs Half when autonegotiation is disabled and 1000 Mb s full duplex for gigabit ports only In the port row of your choice select from the lists Click Submit Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright
38. B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Managing MAC address forwarding database table 99 Figure 27 show mac address table command output page 99 displays sample output from the show mac address table command Figure 27 show mac address table command output 2526T gt enable 2526T show mac address table Mac Address Table Aging Time 368 Number of addresses 5 MAC Address Source MAC Address Source G 8 2 E3 D5 D2 Port 24 6 GE 62 77 60 78 Port 24 11 F9 35 D 46 Port 24 6 15 E8 D 7 99 8 Port 24 G6 19 69 AF C8 86 66 66 FD CB B8 C1 Port 24 2526T mac address table aging time command The mac address table aging time command sets the time that the switch retains unseen MAC addresses The syntax for the mac address table aging time command is mac address table aging time lt time gt The mac address table aging time command is executed in the Global Configuraion command mode Table 16 mac address table aging time command parameters and variables page 99 describes the parameters and variables for the mac address table aging time command Table 16 mac address table aging time command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables time Enter the aging time in seconds that you want for MAC addresses before they are flushed default mac address table aging time command The default mac address table aging time command sets the time that
39. Complete Installing Java Runtime Environment Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 118 Getting Started with Device Manager When the installation is complete the Install Complete dialog box appears Install Complete dialog box Java Device Manager Install Complete Congratulations Java Device Manager has been successfully installed to n Choose Install Sets home admin jOM Choose Install Folder Choose Link Folder Pre installation Summary Installing Install Complete Press Done to quit the installer InstallAnywhere by Zero G 12 Click Done to exit the installation JDM is now installed on your machine End Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments In a UNIX or Linux environment complete the following steps to remove the existing JDM software Step Action 1 Navigate to the directory where the JDM software is installed for example JDM 2 Open the UninstallerData sub directory 3 Run the following file Uninstall_Java_Device_Manager End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Starting Device Manager 119 Device Manager basics This section describes basic procedures fo
40. Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 310 Configuring ports using Device Manager L _ LLL ee Field Description Auto Indicates whether the port is enabled checked for Negotiate autonegotiation or not AdminDuplex The current administrative duplex mode of the port half or full OperDuplex Indicate current duplex value of the port AdminSpeed Set the speed of a port none mbps10 and mbps100 OperSpeed The current operating speed of the port AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a Capability switch can support on a port and that may be advertised by the port using auto negotiation AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be Advertisments advertised during link negotiation Mitld The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned if any IsPortShared Specifies whether a port is shared Multiple ports that are logically represented as a single port are shared Only one shared port may be active at a time PortActive Specifies the physical port components that are active Component for a shared port Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 823162 B Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 4 1 02 02 Standard 19 November 2007 Administering the switch using web based management The administrative options available to you are e Viewing system information page 311
41. Enter Ctrl y to begin The Banner Control feature provides an option to specify the banner text If you choose not to display the banner the system enters the command mode through the default command interface You do not have to press the Ctrl y keys The Banner display that you select is used for subsequent console sessions For executing the new mode in the console you must logout For Telnet access all subsequent sessions use the selected mode This section contains information about the following commands banner command for displaying banner page 201 show banner commana page 201 no banner command page 202 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Customizing your system 201 banner command for displaying banner The banner command for displaying banner specifies the banner displayed at startup either static or custom The syntax for the banner command to display banner is banner custom static disabled lt 1 19 gt LINE The banner command for displaying banner is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 65 banner command parameters page 201 describes the parameters for the banner command Table 65 banner command parameters Parameters Description static Displays the default agent banner custom Displays the custom agent banner
42. Ildp command The default 11dp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters to their default values The syntax for the default 11dp command is default lldp tx interval tx hold multiplier reinit delay tx delay notification interval1 If no parameters are specified the default 11dp command sets all parameters to their default values The default 11dp command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 77 default Ildp command parameters and variables page 219 describes the parameters and variables for the default Ildp command Table 77 default Ildp command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Description tx interval Sets retransmit interval to the default value 30 tx hold multiplier Sets transmission multiplier to the default value 4 reinit delay Sets reinitialize delay to the default value 2 tx delay Sets transmission delay to the default value 2 notification interva Sets notification interval to the default value 5 l lidp config notification command The lldp config notification command enables notification when new neighbor information is stored or when existing information is removed The syntax for the lldp config notification command is lldp port lt portlist gt config notification The lldp config notification command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 78 Ildp config notification command parameters and variables pa
43. In User EXEC exec and Privileged EXEC privExec command modes exit lets you quit the CLI session e In Global Configuration config mode exit moves you back to the privExec command mode e In Interface Configuration config if command mode exit moves you back to the Global Configuration command mode The syntax for the exit command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Basic navigation 93 I __ LLL ee exit The exit command has no parameters or variables reload command The reload command provides you with a configuration rollback mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch typically for remote configurations The reload command lets you temporarily disable the autosave feature for a specified time period 1 to 60 minutes allowing you to make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the current saved configuration During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload command you must use the copy config nvram write memory or save config command to force a manual save of your configurations Once the reload timer expires the switch reloads the last saved configuration To abort the switch reload before the timer expires you must enter the reload cancel command The reload command provides you with a safeguard
44. License Image Filename myecense dat Select Target TETP Server IP Address 192 167 12011 Start Load af New License File 13 License Remove Seting Remove License File Nember No ee ee eee eVeneeve E egg F The following table describes the fields on the License Download page Table 6 License Download page fields Fields Description License Image Filename Type the valid license image filename Select Target Choose the target address TFTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of your TFTP download host Start Load of New License File Choose Yes to start downloading the new license file immediately and No to cancel Remove License File Number Choose the license number to be removed 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stack configuration 45 End Stack configuration The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series provides the capability for intelligent fail safe resilient stacking of up to eight units in a single switch stack This provides uninterrupted connectivity of up to 400 user ports in a virtual switch managed as a single unit ATTENTION All ERS 2500 series switches must be running software release 4 1 before being connected in a stack configuration To set up a st
45. Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 176 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR End PoE tab items Table 46 PoE tab items page 176 describes the PoE tab items Table 46 PoE tab items Item Description AdminEnable Lets you enable or disable PoE on this port By default PoE is enabled Detection Status Displays the operational status of the power device detecting mode on the specified port e disabled detecting function disabled e searching detecting function is enabled and the system is searching for a valid powered device on this port e deliveringPower detection found a valid powered device and the port is delivering power e fault power specific fault detected on port e test detecting device in test mode e otherFault ATTENTION Nortel recommends against using the test operational status PowerClassifications Classification is a way to tag different terminals on the Power over LAN network according to their power consumption Devices such as IP telephones WLAN access points and others can be classified according to their power requirements PowerPriority Lets you set the power priority for the specified port to critical e high e low Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Config
46. Ports Mode tab The Rear Ports Mode tab appears Rear Ports Mode tab 192 167 120 28 Unit 1 Unit Rate Limit Rear Ports Mode RearPortAdminMode standalone stacking RearPortOperMode standalone Refresh Close Help Switch reset is required in order to have rear ports mode change to take effect 3 Select Standalone or Stacking Mode from the radio buttons to configure the operational mode of the rear ports ATTENTION A switch reboot is required to the configured operational mode to take effect End The following table describes the Rear Port Mode tab items Table 111 Rear Ports Mode tab fields RearPortAdminMode Standalone Select this radio button to configure the operational mode of the rear ports to Standalone Mode Stacking Select this radio button to configure the operational mode of the rear ports to Stacking Mode RearPortOperMode Displays the configured operational mode of the rear ports Nortel rb dg Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing switch IP information 253 Viewing switch IP information You can view the switch IP information using the IP dialog box To open the IP dialog box use the following procedure From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The Edit IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab display
47. Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 204 System configuration using the CLI The following figure shows a sample output of the show interfaces verbose command Figure 70 show interfaces verbose command output 2526T gt show interfaces verbose Port Trunk Admin Enable Oper Down Oper EAP Up Oper STP Forwarding wn LinkTrap Enabled futonegotiation Enabled Port 2 Trunk Admin Enable Oper Down Oper EAP Up Oper STP Forwarding Link Down LinkTrap Enabled futonegotiation Enabled Port 3 Trunk More q Quit space return Cont inue gt show interfaces config command The show interfaces config command displays the current operational status of interfaces and provides supplementary information about the current port settings for Spanning Tree Protocol The syntax for the show interfaces config command is show interfaces lt portlist gt config The show interfaces config command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 68 show interfaces config command parameters and variables page 204 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces config command Table 68 show interfaces config command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables lt portlist gt Enter the ports you want to display Figure 71 show interfaces config c
48. Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Publication NN47215 500 323162 B Document status Standard Document version 02 02 Document date 19 November 2007 To provide feedback or report a problem in this document go to www nortel com documentfeedback Sourced in Canada India and the United States of America The information in this document is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant Nortel Nortel Networks the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Trademarks are acknowledged with an asterisk at their first appearance in the document All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners NORTEL
49. Series stacking CFG mirror image process The CFG mirror image process is triggered by specific events Power Cycle After a power cycle all the CFG images in a stack are mirrored Figure 15 CFG mirror process in stack page 56 illustrates the CFG mirror images in a three unit stack after the stack is powered on Unit 1 is the Based Unit BU and all other units are Non Based Units NBU e Unit 1 BU contains mirror images for unit 2 CFG 2 and unit 3 CFG 3 e Unit 2 NBU is the TEMP BU It contains a mirror image of unit 1 CFG 1 in case the BU unit 1 is removed from the stack e All three mirror images CFG 1 CFG 2 and CFG 3 are active e Unit 2 is the Associated Unit of the CFG 2 mirror image e The Mac Address 2 is the Associated Mac Address AMA of the CFG 2 mirror image Figure 15 CFG mirror process in stack Unit 1 BU in stack Unit 2 NBU in stack Unit 3 NBU in stack MAC Address 1 MAC Address 2 MAC Address 3 DRAM CFG 2 CFG 1 Mirror Image Image CFG 3 Mirror Image Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Auto Unit Replacement 57 Adding a unit In a stack that does not have any INACTIVE CFG mirror images adding a new unit causes the CFG image of the new unit to be mirrored in the stack For example in Figure 16 CFG mirror images in the stack afte
50. Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on Windows 103 e Installing JDM on Windows from the CD page 104 e Installing JDM on Windows from the web page 104 e Executing the JDM installation software on Windows page 105 Windows minimum requirements The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on Microsoft Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 or Windows Vista are e 350 MHz or higher Pentium processor e 512 MB DRAM e 400 MB space on hard drive Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows ATTENTION Removing previous versions of JDM is an optional process Multiple versions of JDM can exist on one system as long as each version is in a separate location If you decide to allow previous versions of JDM to remain then you must choose a different folder to use during the installation process Remove existing versions of Device Manager software by using the Uninstall DM option that was created in the Windows Start menu during installation For example to remove Device Manager from a Windows XP system using the default program group choose the following option from the Windows Start menu All Programs gt Nortel gt Java Device Manager gt Uninstall DM If no program group was added to the Windows Start menu during installation then complete the following steps to remove existing Device Manager software Step Action 1 Navigate to the folder where the JD
51. System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 367 Command show radius server show rate limit show rmon alarm Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show rate limit command page 243 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 show rmon event show rmon history show rmon stats show running config show snmp server community show sntp show spanning tree config port lt portlist gt cost calc mode op mode port lt portlist gt show spanning tree mstp config show spanning tree mstp msti config lt 1 7 gt show spanning tree mstp msti port config lt 1 7 gt lt portlist gt show spanning tree mstp msti port statistics lt 1 7 gt lt portlist gt show spanning tree mstp msti statistics lt 1 7 gt show spanning tree mstp port config lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 show running config commana page 191 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 S
52. System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Modifying system settings 323 ATTENTION The configurable parameters on the System page are displayed in a read only format on the System Information home page To configure system settings use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt System The System page appears Figure 119 System page Configuration gt System System Characteristics Setting Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 26T HW 0A FVV 1 0 0 5 SW v4 0 0 033 BN 33 c Nortel Networks System ObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 72 1 System Up Time 2 0 9 23 System Contact System Description System Name System Location Table 143 System page items page 323 describes the items on the System page Table 143 System page items System The factory set description of the hardware and software Description versions System Object ID The character string that the vendor created to uniquely identify this device Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 324 Configuring the switch using web based management Item Description System Up Time The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the system was last re initialized ATTENTION
53. The maximum average for the counter for a given polling interval over the cumulative elapsed time LastValue The average for the counter over the last polling interval Types of graphs With Device Manager you can create line area bar and pie graphs Figure 39 Line graph page 135 Figure 40 Area graph page 136 Figure 41 Bar graph page 136 and Figure 42 Pie graph page 137 provide examples of different types of graphs Figure 39 Line graph Z 10 10 40 26 Port 1 1 Interface InOctets eale GQ Close 214392000 214391000 214390000 214387000 10 46 00 10 46 06 AbsoluteValue Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 136 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 40 Area graph Z 10 10 40 29 graphPort Interface OutOctets BEE EIEN S 0 1509 19 150921 150923 15 09 25 15 09 27 1509 29 Port 1 24 Figure 41 Bar graph Z 10 10 40 26 Port 1 1 Interface AbsoluteValue BEE GUNES CAA cs 220000000 E inOctets 5 QutOctets E inUcastPkts OutUcastPkts E inNUcastPkts OutNUcastPkts E InDiscards E OutDiscards E nErrors OutErrors 40000000 20000000 0 W010 10 00 15 11 01 20 11 01 25 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard
54. TimeFilter LocalPortNum Identifies the local port on which the remote system information is received Index An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular MSAP An agent is encouraged to assign monotonically increasing index values to new entries starting with one after each reboot ChassisldSubtype The type of encoding used to identify the remote system chassis e chassisComponent e interfaceAlias e portComponent e macAddress e networkAddress e interfaceName local Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 297 Field Description Chassisld Remote chassis ID SysCapSupported Identifies the system capabilities supported on the remote system SysCapEnabled Identifies the system capabilities that are enabled on the remote system SysName Remote system name SysDesc Remote system description PortldSubtype The type of encoding used to identify the remote port interfaceAlias e portComponent e macAddress networkAddress interfaceName agentCircuitld local Portld Remote port ID PortDesc Remote port description End Neighbor Mgmt Address tab With the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab you can view LLDP management properties for the remote system Use th
55. Write community e SNMP Trap IP addresses and communities up to four e New default VLAN During the initial setup mode all ports are assigned to the new default VLAN A port based Quick Start VLAN is created if the new default VLAN does not exist All ports are removed from the current default VLAN and assigned to the Quick Start VLAN The PVIDs for all ports are changed to the Quick Start VLAN The Quick Start VLAN is also designated as the management VLAN To configure the initial settings using the Quick Start feature Step Action 1 From the main menu select Administration gt Quick Start The Quick Start page is displayed Figure 113 Quick Start page NORTEL Administration gt Quick Start in Use 10 111 991 10 255 255 2550 PONTE Ett 284 sesssessssessse Qutek Start VLAN 2 Click on the Submit button after making the required settings The following table describes the items on the Quick Start page Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 314 Administering the switch using web based management Table 141 Items on the Quick Start page Section Item Description In Band Switch Specify a new IP address for the IP Address switch In Band Subnet Enter a new subnet mask Mask Default Specify an IP address for the Gateway default gateway Community R
56. a valid powered device and the port is delivering power Fault power specific fault detected on the port Test detecting function is in test mode which is set using SNMP Other fault detecting function is idle due to fault ATTENTION Nortel recommends against using the test operational status Classifica Classification is a way to tag different terminals on the power over LAN network tion according to their power consumption Devices such as IP telephones WLAN access points and others are classified according to their power requirements The meaning of the classification labels is defined in the IEEE 802 3af specification This parameter is valid only while a device is being powered Limit Watt Sets the maximum amount of power supplied to that port The range for Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is 3W to 16W The default value is 16W Priority Priority is used to determine which port s are shut down when the total power of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series exceeds the power budget for that switch or available DTE power The lower priority ports are shut down in favor of higher priority ports The range is low high and critical The default value is low ATTENTION When two ports have the same priority and one must be shut down the port with the higher port number is shut down first Volt V Displays the measured voltage supplied by the port Current mA Displays the measured current supplied by
57. affiliates Nortel PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPT ANCE OF I accept the terms of the License Agreement do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement 2 Click accept the terms of the License Agreement 3 Click Next The Choose Install Set dialog box appears Choose Install Set dialog box Java Device Manager Installation and Use of Java Device Manager Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement Nortel Inc Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement License i Agreement is between you the end user installing E Customer and Nortel Corporation and its sei contin subsidiaries and affiliates Nortel PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT If you do not acce J accept the terms of the License Agreement 1 do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement 4 Do one of the following Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 115 e Select Typical installation to install the common set features as well as online
58. are dnidConfig dnidimg upldConfig dnidFw dnidimglfNewer dnidlmgNoReset dnidFwNoReset The newly downloaded config image or diag file cannot take effect until the next boot cycle of the device This object is used to get the status of the latest action as shown by s5AgInfoFileAction The values that can be read are other if no action taken since the boot up inProgress the operation is in progress success the operation succeeds fail the operation failed ASCII config file To display the ASCII Config file tab use the following procedure Inthe File System dialog box click on the ASCII Config File tab The ASCII Config File tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 4 1 19 November 2007 274 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 95 File system ASCII Config File dialog box 192 167 120 28 FileSystem Config Image Diag file Ascii Config File License File Save Configuration LoadServerAddr 192 167 3 2 AsciiConfigFilename AsciiConfighutoDownload disabled useBootp useConfig AsciiConfigAutoDidStatus passed AsciiConfigManualDownload downloadNow AsciiConfigManualDldStatus passed AsciiConfigManualUpload uploadNow AsciiConfigManualUpldStatus passed Refresh Chose Help Table 123 ASCI
59. at nut Hatt StH ant went nit nun nut nun nun nut nun nun NUUN NNNNNNUNNRHENH HUN nun nun NNRNNNNNHNN Renae nen HEH RHEE HHH nun nun HRRRRHRHRHH HARRAH Enter Ctrl Y to begin POA PE DE DE DE DE DEDE DEE MEMEDE PAE DE E DEDEDE DEDE DEDEDE ME DE DEDE DEME DE DE DEEE DE DEDEDE E DE LIA ASIII DEDE E DE DEDEDE A Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 58T_PWR Shekel se Nortel Stated xe Copyright lt c 1996 2686 All Rights Reserved wren belated SSH ee xw HUBA PW 1 6 6 5 SW u4 6 80 6 beieied D t D EOE D DE DE DEDEDE DE DE DE EE DE DE DEDE E DE DE DE DE PE DE OE DE DE DE DE RO DAE DE HE DE DE DEDE E E DE RE DE DE DEDEDE DE MEDE D DE To disable the banner Inthe Banner tab click on the disabled radio button and then click Apply To check that the banner is disabled Inthe main menu click on Device gt Telnet The Telnet window appears without the banner Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 271 Custom Banner tab The Custom Banner tab lets you specify the display for a custom banner in Telnet To open the Custom Banner tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 From the main menu choose Edit gt Chassis The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed 3 Click the Custom Banner tab The Cu
60. back panel Table 3 Components on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series back panel Item Description 1 AC power receptacle Kensington lock Base Unit select switch Additional 1000BaseT RJ 45 connector rear ports For switch operating mode ports 27 28 on 2526T models and ports 51 52 on 2550T models For stack operating mode Link UP Link DOWN for connecting with other units in stack AJOJN Kensington lock Using the Kensington lock you can secure your switch Wrap the steel cable around a secure immovable object insert the cable lock in the Kensington Security Lock and turn the key Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 30 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware Cooling fans Cooling fans are located on one side of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to provide cooling for the internal components When you install the switch be sure to allow enough space on both sides of the switch for adequate ventilation AC power receptacle The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord that is supplied with the switch For installation outside North America make sure that you have the proper power cord for your region Any cord used must have a CEE 22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320 030 specifications Table 4 International power cord
61. box 253 ip domain name command 187 ip name server command 186 IP page 319 IP Setting field 321 IpAdadr field 280 281 IPAddress field 256 IpAddress field 265 IsPortShared field 307 310 L LastChange field 306 309 LastLoadProtocol field 261 LastSyncSource field 277 LastSyncTime field 277 LastValue statistics 135 LEDs 155 display panel 27 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 Index 383 LEDs in device view 130 legend port color 127 131 License download 44 Line Chart button 140 Link Layer Discovery Protocol 74 link status 233 link lacking color 131 LinkTrap field 306 309 Listen for Syslogs 122 Listen for Traps 122 LLDP 74 TLVs 75 lldp command 218 lldp config notification command 219 IIdp status command 222 lldp tx tlv command 221 LoadServerAdar field 266 272 274 LocalSeg field 281 LocalStoragelmageVersion field 261 Location field 262 264 Log Scale button 140 logging 68 208 logging in 67 logging out 316 logging out of Web based management 316 logout command 90 low 162 LstChng field 262 264 MAC address 96 97 98 MAC Address field 152 155 MDAs 240 menu bar Device Manager 127 menus 127 Microsoft Internet Explorer software version requirements 145 Minimum statistics 134 MLT 202 Mitld field 307 310 Mtu field 306 309 multiple objects selectin
62. command page 201 show config network command page 190 show cli info mode password type show clock summer time show cli command page 194 show clock summer time page 215 show clock time zone show clock time zone page 214 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series show eapol Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series show eapol guest vlan interface lt portlist gt Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series show http port show interfaces names lt portlist gt Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show interfaces command page 202 show interface FastEthernet eapol auth diags portlist auth stats portlist Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show interfaces gbic info lt portlist gt lt portlist gt config names lt portlist gt show interfaces lt portlist gt config show interfaces commana page 202 show interfaces config command page 204 show ip address show ip address commana page 182 show ip bootp default gateway show ip dns show ip command page 181 show ip dns command page 185 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series show ipmgr Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel E
63. current serial port information which includes connection speed as well as the terminal width and length in number of characters The syntax for the show terminal command is show terminal The show terminal command is executed in the User Exec command mode The show terminal command has no parameters or variables Figure 63 show terminal command output page 193 shows the output from the show terminal command Figure 63 show terminal command output 255 T PWR gt enable 255 T PWRH show terminal Terminal speed 9600 Terminal width 79 Terminal length 23 255 T PWRH terminal command The terminal command configures the settings for the terminal These settings are transmit and receive speeds terminal length and terminal width The syntax of the terminal command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 194 System configuration using the CLI terminal speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 length lt 1 132 gt width lt 1 132 gt The terminal command is executed in the User Exec mode Table 58 terminal command parameters and variables page 194 describes the parameters and variables for the terminal command Table 58 terminal command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p speed Sets the transmit and receive baud rates for the terminal 2400 4800 9600
64. device the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series reverts to half duplex mode When autonegotiation capable devices are attached to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series the ports negotiate down from 100 Mb s speed and full duplex mode until the attached device acknowledges a supported speed and duplex mode Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA lets you customize the capabilities that you advertise For example if a port is capable of 10 100 1000 full duplex operation the port can be configured to only advertise 10 half duplex capabilities CANA lets you control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet switches as part of the autonegotiation process In the current software releases autonegotiation can either be enabled or disabled When autonegotiation is disabled the hardware is configured for a single fixed speed and duplex value When autonegotiation is enabled the advertisement made by the product is a constant value based upon all speed and duplex modes supported by the hardware Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 78 System configuration software features When autonegotiating the switch selects the highest common operating mode supported between the switch and its link partner In certain situations it is useful to autone
65. equal to the number of times the switch restarted from the last flash memory erase Last Reset Type Power Cycle sysContact sysName sysLocation Zero length string Zero length string Zero length string Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 344 Appendix B Default settings Field Default setting Aging Time 300 seconds Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned MAC Address Security Disabled MAC Address Security SNMP Locked Disabled Partition Port on Intrusion Detected Disabled Partition Time 0 seconds the value 0 indicates forever DA Filtering on Intrusion Detected Disabled Re authentication period 3600 seconds Quiet Period 60 seconds Transmit Period 30 seconds Maximum Requests 2 attempts Create VLAN 1 Delete VLAN blank field Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix B Default settings 345 TTT Te Field Default setting VLAN Name VLAN VLAN number Management VLAN Yes VLAN 1 VLAN State Inactive Port Membership Default all ports assigned as untagged members of VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Filter Untagged Frames No PVID 1 Tagging Untagged Access
66. following procedure gt Do one of the following e On the toolbar click the Trap Log button e From the Device Manager Main Menu choose Device gt Trap Log ATTENTION When you operate Device Manager from a UNIX platform you must be logged in as root in order to receive traps Device Manager receives traps on port 162 If this port is being used by another application you cannot view the trap log until the other application is disabled and Device Manager is restarted Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Online Help 143 By default traps are sent in SNMP V2c format However if you are using an older network management system NMS one that supports only SNMP V1 traps you can specify the traps to be sent in V1 format For more information about traps and trap receivers see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Online Help Online Help in Device Manager is context sensitive You use a Web browser to display online Help The Web browser should launch automatically when you click the Help button If the Help topic you are accessing is not displayed in your browser exit the existing browser session and click the Help button again If the Web browser does not launch the default locations of the Help files are the direct
67. for the script file name and TFTP server address and then downloads the script Table 56 configure network command parameters and variables page 189 describes the parameters and variables for the configure network command Table 56 configure network command parameters and variables Parameters and ae Description variables load on boot disable use b Specifies the settings for automatically loading a configuration file ootp use config when the system boots e disable disables the automatic loading of config file e use boot specifies using the BootP file as the automatically loaded config file use config specifies using the ASCII configuration file as the automatically loaded config file ATTENTION When you enter configure network with no parameters the system prompts you for the script file name and TFTP server address and then downloads the script If you omit this parameter the system immediately downloads and runs the ASCII config file Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 190 System configuration using the CLI Parameters and variables filename lt WORD gt Description Specifies the file name ATTENTION If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP the system uses the configured file name address lt XXX XXX XX
68. gt image if newer lt image name gt diag lt filename gt no reset poe module image The download command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode ATTENTION You can use the download command without parameters The system displays the most recently used TFTP server IP address and file name if you still want to use these press Enter You can also change these Table 90 download command parameters and variables page 230 describes the parameters and variables for the download command Table 90 download command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p address lt ip gt Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server you want to use Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Upgrading software 231 Parameters and h Description variables p ATTENTION If this parameter is omitted the system goes to the server specified by the tftp server command image lt image na Enter the name of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series me gt software image you want to download image if newer Enter the name of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt image name gt software image of the newer version you want to download diag lt filename gt Enter the name of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series diagnostics image you want to downloa
69. is tecommended only for usets with limited disk space installing Install Complete Help Only all on line help files will be installed Custom Choose this option to customize the features to be installed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on Windows 107 4 Do one of the following e Select Typical installation to install the common set features as well as online help e Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install recommended for those with limited disk space e Select Help to install only the online help e Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation 5 Click Next If you did not select Custom installation in step 4 then the Choose Install Folder dialog box appears Continue with step 8 If you selected Custom installation in step 4 then the Feature Sets dialog box appears Feature Sets dialog box z3 Feature Sets m License Agreement p 4 Choose Install Sets F Passport 1K Help I Passport 8K Help g Choose Install Fofder 7 Passport 8300 Help F Passport 1424 Help en Shortcut Folde KI B Pieinstallation Summary Description This installs the application features only without help 6 Select which features to install from the feature sets list 7 Click Next The Ch
70. k eves JI sysContact Nesses ssssss sysName sysLocation Administration System Information Quick Start gt Security 7 Logout gt Reset 7 Reset To Detault gt Suppor Table 140 System Information page items page 312 describes the items on the System Information page Table 140 System Information page items Item Description sysDescription The default description of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series sysUpTime The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the system was last re initialized sysName The name created by the network administrator to identify the switch for example Finance Group sysLocation The location name created by the network administrator to identify the switch location for example first floor sysContact The name email address and telephone number of the person to contact about switch operation Quick Start The Quick Start feature lets the administrator of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series make the initial setup by consolidating multiple setup pages into a single page The Quick Start screen allows the administrator to configure the following information IP address e Subnet mask e Default gateway e SNMP Read community Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Quick Start 313 e SNMP
71. lt 1 120 gt interval lt 1 60 gt debug The ping command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 51 ping command parameters and variables page 183 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command Table 51 ping command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables XXX XXX XXX XKK Specify the IP address of the target device in dotted decimal notation datasize Specifies the size of the ICMP packet to be sent The lt 64 4096 gt data size range is from 64 to 4096 bytes count lt 1 9999 gt Sets the number of ICMP packets to be sent The continuous continuous mode sets the ping running until the user interrupts it by entering Ctrl C timeout t Set the timeout using either the timeout or t lt 1 120 gt parameter followed by the number of seconds the switch must wait before timing out interval lt 1 60 gt Specifies the number of seconds between transmitted packets debug Provides additional output information such as ICMP sequence number and trip time If the device receives the packet it sends a ping reply When the switch receives the reply it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being used If no reply is received a message indicates that the address is not responding Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 N
72. menu choose Edit gt Chassis The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed 3 Click the Fan tab The Fan tab appears Edit Chassis dialog box Fan tab 492 467 120 20 Chassis System Base Unit Info Agert SNMP Trap Receivers PowerSupply Fan Barner Custom Barner ADAC ADAC MAC Ranges Stack Monitor chassis t Fan 1 normal fChassis 1 Fan 2 normal End The following table describes the Fan tab fields Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 269 Table 121 Fan tab fields Field Banner tab Chassis Fan The operational state of the fan Values include Description e other Some other state e notAvail This state is not available e removed Fan was removed e disabled Fan is disabled normal Fan is operating in normal operation e resetiInProg A reset of the fan is in progress e testing Fan is doing a self test e warning Fan is operating at a warning level e nonFatalErr Fan is operating at error level e fatalErr An error stopped the fan operation e notConfig Fan needs to be configured The allowable values are determined by the component type The Banner tab lets you specify banner display in TELNET You can specify either the default banner or a
73. mirror image residing in unit 2 becomes INACTIVE e Asecond copy of the INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image is created in unit 3 e The TEMP BU unit 2 contains all CFG mirror images of the stack s NBUs e The CFG 2 mirror image is created in unit 3 Unit 3 becomes the next TEMP BU in case the current TEMP BU is removed Restoring a CFG image Restoring a CFG image is a process that overwrites the CFG image of a new unit in a stack with an INACTIVE mirror image stored in the stack Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 60 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking ATTENTION Restore a CFG image to a new unit happens only if the following conditions are met The AUR feature is enabled There is at least one INACTIVE CFG mirror image in the stack The MAC Address of the new unit is different from all the AMA of the INACTIVE CFG mirror images in the stack The image restore process consists of the following steps Step Action 1 Adding a new unit to a stack 2 The INACTIVE CFG mirror image in the stack is sent to the new unit The INACTIVE CFG mirror image becomes ACTIVE 3 The new unit saves the received CFG image to its flash 4 The new unit resets itself End For example if a unit 5 MAC Address 5 is added to the stack shown in Figure 18 CFG mirror images in the
74. moved or modified The entries also can include unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the stack not currently active MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX X MAC address of the corresponding unit X listed in the Current Unit Number field New Unit Choose a new number to assign to your Number 9 y selected policy switch ATTENTION If you leave the field blank the system automatically selects the next available number 2 Choose the new number to assign to the switch 3 Click Submit 4 A message prompts for confirmation of the request Click Yes End Identifying unit numbers Identify the unit numbers of the switches participating in a stack configuration by viewing the LEDs on the front panel of each switch To identify unit numbers in your configuration Step Action 1 Open the Identify Unit Numbers screen by selecting Summary gt Identify Unit Numbers from the menu This screen is illustrated in Figure 52 Identifying Unit Numbers page page 156 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 156 Using the Web based management interface Figure 52 Identifying Unit Numbers page N RTEL Accoss IK Runmary Port LEDs fil on he Iront panel of he switch correspond o ils unit number 2 To continue viewing summary information or to start the conf
75. open the Addresses tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the Addresses tab The Addresses tab appears Edit IP eich box IP Address tab x addr NetMask BeastAddr ReasmMaxSize 192 167 120 28 255 255 255 0 1 65535 eo I Som End The following table describes the Address tab fields Table 113 Addresses tab fields Description The device IP address NetMask The subnet mask address Nortel rb aleei Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing switch IP information 255 Field Description BcastAddr The value of the least significant bit in the IP broadcast address used for sending datagrams on the logical interface associated with the IP address of this entry For example when the Internet standard all ones broadcast address is used the value is 1 This value applies to both the subnet and network broadcasts addresses used by the entity on this logical interface ReasmMaxSize The size of the largest IP datagram that this entity can reassemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on this interface ARP tab The ARP Address Resolution Protocol tab shows the MAC addresses and the associated IP addresses for the
76. parameters on a TFTP server 333 Enabling and disabling autosave 333 Configuring port communication speed 334 Configuring Rate Limiting 335 Configuring Rate Limiting 335 Troubleshooting 337 Interpreting the LEDs 337 Diagnosing and correcting problems 337 Normal power up sequence 338 Port connection problems 339 Appendix A DB 9 RS 232 D Console Comm Port connector 341 Appendix B Default settings 343 Appendix C Sample BootP configuration file 351 Appendix D Command List 353 Appendix E Technical specifications 375 Environmental specifications 375 AC power specifications 375 Physical dimensions 376 Performance specifications 376 Network protocol and standards compatibility 376 Safety agency certification 377 Electromagnetic emissions 377 Electromagnetic immunity 378 Index 379 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 14 Contents Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks New in this release The following sections detail what s new in Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 for Release 4 1 Features Features Other changes For information about changes that are feature related see the following sections Othe
77. selected enabled Open Device dialog box displays SNMPv38 options User Name Indicates the name of the user Context Name Context Name string Does not apply to Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Authentication Identifies the authentication protocol Protocol used Authentication Specifies the current authentication Password password Privacy Protocol Identifies the privacy protocol Privacy Passwo Specifies the current privacy password rd ATTENTION Not all information is required for connection to a switch If the v3 Enabled check box is not selected only a Device Name Read Community and Write Community value are needed If the v3 Enabled check box is not selected only a Device Name Read Community and Write Community value are needed If you enable Use default community strings in properties the Device Manager uses the default values specified in the device properties for Read Community and Write Community If v3 Enabled is selected then Device Name User Name Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol and Privacy Password are required If v3 Enabled is selected then Device Name User Name Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol and Privacy Password are required Some devices require a value in Context Name 2 In the Device Name text box type the DNS name or IP address of the device 3 In the Read Community and Write Community text bo
78. show auto negotiation capabilities port lt portlist gt The show auto negotiation capabilities command is executed in the User Exec command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 246 Ethernet port management using the CLI Table 105 show auto negotiation capabilities command page 246 describes the parameters and variables for the show auto negotiation capabilities command Table 105 show auto negotiation capabilities command Parameters and values Description port lt portlist gt Enter ports for which you want the autonegotiation capabilities displayed Figure 90 show auto negotiation capabilities command output page 246 displays sample output from the show auto negotiation capabilities command Figure 90 show auto negotiation capabilities command output 2526T conf ig if tshow auto negotiation capabilities port 2 4 8 Port Autonegotiation Capabilities 2 16Full 1 Half 16 Full 166Half 4 16Full 1 Half 16 Full 166Half 8 1 Full 1 Half 16 Full 166Half 2526T lt conf ig if gt _ auto negotiation advertisements command The auto negotiation advertisements command configures advertisements for the switch The syntax for the auto negotiation advertisements command is auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt 10 full 10 half 100 full 100 half
79. single port appears with the Interface tab displayed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing and editing a single port configuration 305 Figure 110 Port dialog box Interface tab 192 167 120 28 Port 1 7 Interface yLan STG EAPOL EAPOL Advance LACP ADAC Index Name Descr Type Mtu PhysAddress AdminStatus OperStatus LastChange LinkTrap 7 mc Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T Module Port 7 ethernet csmacd 1514 00 19 69 aF c8 00 up C down down 2 days 02h 51m 06s enabled disabled AdminDuplex OperDuplex AdminSpeed OperSpeed AutoNegotiationCapability AutoNegotiationAdvertisements MitId IsPortShared PortActiveComponent V AutoNegotiate C half full Full mbpsio mbpsi00 C mbpsio00 C mbpsioo00 100 mbps 10Half 10Full 100Half 100Full MV 100HalF P 1000Full M 10HalF Jv 100Full J PauseFrame IV 10Full J7 1000HalF I AsymmPauseFrame 0 portNotShared fixedPort y Refresh Close Help ATTENTION 10 100BASE TX ports may not autonegotiate correctly with older 10 100BASE TX equipment In some cases the older devices can be upgraded with new firmware or driver revisions If an upgrade does not allow autonegotiation to correctly identify the link speed and d
80. specifications page 30 lists specifications for international power cords Table 4 International power cord specifications Country Plug description Continental Europe 220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz Single phase Specifications Typical plug e CEE7 standard VII male plug e Harmonized cord HAR marking on the outside of the cord jacket to comply with the CENELEC Harmonized Document HD 21 U S Canada Japan 100 or 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Single phase e NEMA5 15P male plug e UL recognized UL stamped on cord jacket e CSA certified CSA label secured to the cord Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 31 Country Plug Se ey description Specifications Typical plug United Kingdom 240 VAC 50 Hz Single phase e BS1363 male plug with fuse Harmonized cord 229FA Australia 240 VAC 50 Hz A AS3112 1981 Male plug Single phase RA 230FA CAUTION Read immediately Inspect the power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is appropriately certified for use with your electrical system Immediately discard this power cord if it is inappropriate for electrical systems in your country and obtain the proper cord as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances S
81. stack after removing the BU unit 1 page 59 the following occurs see Figure 19 CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 5 page 61 The INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image is copied to the CFG 5 image Unit 5 now has the configuration of unit 1 that is no longer in the stack The INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image in unit 2 becomes ACTIVE The INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image in unit 3 is removed The MAC Address 5 of the unit 5 becomes the new AMA of the CFG 1 mirror image Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Auto Unit Replacement 61 Figure 19 CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 5 Unit 2 TEMP BU in stack MAC Address 2 CFG 2 Image DRAM Unit 3 NBU in stack MAC Address 3 CFG 3 Image DRAM Unit 4 NBU in stack MAC Address 4 CFG 4 Image DRAM Unit 5 NBU in stack MAC Address 5 CFG 1 Image DRAM CFG 2 Mirror Image Synchronizing the CFG mirror images with CFG images A CFG mirror image is updated whenever a CFG flash synchronization occurs in the AU CFG1 Mirror Image CFG 3 Mirror Image CFG 4 Mirror Image Configuring AUR using the CLI This section describes the CLI commands used in AUR configuration show stack auto unit replacement command The show stack auto unit replacement command displays the current AUR settings
82. switch To open the ARP tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the ARP tab The ARP tab appears Edit IP aie box ARP tab xi 1 24 00 0c F8 42 70 78 192 167 120 1 dynamic eo I Som End The following table describes the ARP tab fields Table 114 ARP tab fields Field Description S The unit and port number MacAddress_ The unique hardware address of the device Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 256 Configuring the switch using Device Manager TCP tab Field Description IpAddress The Internet Protocol address of the device used to represent a point of attachment in a TCP IP internetwork Type The type of mapping The TCP tab displays TCP information for the switch To open the TCP tab use the following procedure Step 1 Action From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Click the TCP tab The TCP tab appears TCP tab 192 167 120 268 IP x aaa e 50000 3200000 ARE 1 row s The following table describes the TCP tab fields Table 115 TCP tab fields Field Description
83. switch failed to synchronize ryServer with the secondary server address SynchFailures CurrentTime Specifies the switch s current Coordinated Universal Time UTC ATTENTION In order to clear out the PrimaryServerAddress and SecondaryServerAddress you must first set the State to disabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 278 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Configuring local time zone using the device manager You can set the local time zone on the ERS 2500 using Time Zone tab Use the following procedure to set the local time zone Step Action 1 From the Edit menu choose SNTP Clock The SNTP_Clock dialog box appears 2 Click theTime Zone tab The Time Zone tab appears a Simple Network Time Protocol Time Zone Daylight Saving Time TimeZone 0 00 Refresh Close Help Time differencesoffset hh mm from UTC 3 Seect the time zone offset in the TimeZone box 4 Click Apply End Configuring daylight savings time using the device manager You can set daylight saving start and end time using the on the ERS 2500 using Daylight Saving Time tab Use the following procedure to set daylight saving start and end time Step Action 1 From the Edit menu choose SNTP Clock The SNTP_Clock dialog box appears 2 Cli
84. sync failures Last sync time Not Set Next sync time Not Set Current time Not Set 2526T lt conf ig gt t sntp enable command ATTENTION The default setting for SNTP is disabled The sntp enable command enables SNTP The syntax for the sntp enable command is sntp enable The sntp enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The sntp enable command has no parameters or variables no sntp enable command The no sntp enable command disables SNTP The syntax for the no sntp enable command is no sntp enable The no sntp enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no sntp enable command has no parameters or variables sntp server primary address command The sntp server primary address command specifies the IP addresses of the primary NTP server The syntax for the sntp server primary address command is sntp server primary address lt A B C D gt The sntp server primary address command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 210 System configuration using the CLI Table 69 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables page 210 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server primary address command Table 69 sntp server primary a
85. test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress To reboot the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series without making changes since your last Submit request Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Reset Figure 114 Reset page NORTEL Administration gt Reset Reset A Reset To Default gt Support The reset warning message displays Figure 115 Reset page message Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 4re you sure you want to reset L ox J emea _ 2 Click OK End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 316 Administering the switch using web based management Changing the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to system defaults You can replace all configured switch parameters with the factory default values CAUTION If you choose change to default settings all configured settings are replaced with factory default settings when you click Submit For more information about factory default settings see Appendix Default settings page 343 During the process of changing to default settings the switch initiates a self test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progr
86. the Global Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 160 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR Table 35 poe poe power usage threshold command parameters and variables page 160 describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe power usage threshold command Table 35 poe poe power usage threshold command parameters and variables Parameters and Deserlotion variables p oe Enter the percentage of total available power you want the switch to use prior to sending a trap ATTENTION The default setting is 80 Unit Set a percentage usage threshold above which the system sends a trap for each unit poe poe trap command The poe poe trap command enables the traps for the PoE functions on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR The syntax for the poe poe trap command is poe poe trap Unit The poe poe trap command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode no poe trap command The no poe trap command disables the traps for the PoE functions on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR The syntax for the no poe trap command is no poe trap Unit The no poe trap command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI You can configure power parameters f
87. the IP address using the CLI Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 72 System configuration software features I ____SLLL ee If an IP address is not currently in use these actions take effect immediately If an IP address is currently in use these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled BootP Disabled This option lets you manage the switch by using the IP address set from the console terminal The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the BootP Disabled mode as described in the following steps e The switch does not broadcast BootP requests regardless of whether an IP address is set from the console terminal e The switch can be managed only by using the in band switch IP address set from the console terminal BootP or Last Address This option lets you manage the switch even if a BootP server is not reachable The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the BootP or Last Address mode as described in the following steps e When you specify the IP data from the console terminal the IP address becomes the in band address of the switch BootP requests are not broadcast You can manage the switch using this in band IP address e When you do not specify the in band IP address from the console terminal the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it recei
88. the following Nortel switches e Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T e Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR e Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T e Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR The term Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is used in this document to describe the features common to the switches mentioned above A switch is referred to by its specific name while describing a feature exclusive to the switch The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the Standalone Mode and Stacking Mode in this product release Before you begin This guide is intended for network administrators who have the following background e basic knowledge of networks switching Ethernet bridging and IP routing e familiarity with networking concepts and terminology e basic knowledge of network topologies Text conventions This guide uses the following text conventions Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 18 Introduction angle brackets lt gt Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping lt ip address gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 bold body text Indicates objects such as window names dialog box names and icons as well as user interface ob
89. the port Power Watt Displays the measured power supplied by the port Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 172 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR 2 Type the information or make a selection from the list 3 Click Submit End Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager You can use Device Manager to view and edit the Power over Ethernet PoE parameters that apply to the whole switch You can also use Device Manager to set PoE parameters on individual ports One PoE related tab that is not described in this section is the Power Supply tab This tab is accessible through the Chassis dialog box and it displays the status of the internal power supply see Power Supply tab The following sections provide a description of the PoE tabs and details about each item on the tab PoE tab for a single unit page 172 e Device Manager display for PoE ports page 174 PoE tab for ports page 175 PoE tab for a single unit To open the PoE tab for a single unit use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select a single unit 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit gt Unit The Unit dialog box appears with the Unit tab displayed 3 Click the PoE tab The PoE tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch
90. the port number you specified in the interface command Enabling flow control If you use a Gigabit Ethernet with the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series you control traffic on this port using the Elowcontrol command This section covers the following commands flowcontrol commana page 240 e no flowcontrol command page 241 e default flowcontrol commana page 242 flowcontrol command The lowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and controls the traffic rates during congestion The syntax for the flowcontrol command is flowcontrol port lt portlist gt asymmetric symmetric auto disable The lowcontrol command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 100 flowcontrol command parameters and variables page 241 describes the parameters and variables for the flowcontrol command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling flow control 241 Table 100 flowcontrol command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to configure for flow control ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command asymmetric Sets the mode for flow control symmetric auto disable
91. the switch retains unseen MAC addresses to 300 seconds The syntax for the default mac address table aging time command is default mac address aging time The default mac address table aging time Command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 100 CLI Basics The default mac address table aging time command has no parameters or variables Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 101 Getting Started with Device Manager The Java Device Manager JDM software is a Graphical User Interface GUI that lets you manage the switch JDM also referred to as Device Manager provides options found in other management tools such as management of VLANs and MultiLink Trunks and displaying and printing of statistics in graph format To use Device Manager you must have network connectivity to a management station running Device Manager on one of the supported platforms You must also assign an IP address to the switch This chapter contains information on the following topics e Installing Device Manager page 101 e Device Manager basics page 119 Installing Device Manager The JDM software is provided on the de
92. up sequence 338 receiving traps 142 SNTP 68 208 timestamps 68 208 Type field 250 256 262 306 309 types of objects 128 U Unit field 152 unit number 155 identifying 155 numbering units 152 Unit tab 250 UNIX installing Device Manager 111 receiving traps 142 upgrading diagnostics 229 upgrading software 229 UPS 168 UsageThreshold field 173 User Name 125 usernames and passwords 87 Using DNS to ping and Telnet 69 V v3 Enabled 125 ValidFlag tab 266 value changed 134 Ver field 250 262 265 Viewing 303 VLAN field 314 VLAN menu 127 VLAN tab 175 voltage 167 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 4 1 02 02 Standard 19 November 2007 Index 389 W management page 149 Watts 167 navigating the menu 147 HEN penne tone ene 143 M e a e aE home Web Help file accessing 147 9 i page 146 o a red a window Device Manager 126 q Windows Web based management opening from Device Manager 141 Web based management interface home page graphic 142 logging in 146 main menu icons installing Device Manager 103 Write Community field 124 Write Community SNMP 124 125 write memory command 205 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 390 Index Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500
93. use NextBootLoad The transport protocol to be used by the agent to load Protocol the configuration information and the image at the next boot LastLoadProtocol The transport protocol last used to load the image and configuration information on the switch Base Unit Info tab The Base Unit Info tab provides read only information about the operating status of the hardware and whether or not the default factory settings are being used To open the Base Unit Info tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit gt Chassis Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 262 Configuring the switch using Device Manager The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed 3 Click the Base Unit Info tab The Base Unit Info tab appears Syston Cine UE V0 Agere DOP Trap Recewers PomerSupnty Pan Darmar Catam Banner ADAC AOAC MAC Ranges Stach More Tyee 771 Deser 24 10 100Basa TX pha 2 10 100 000 5FF conto ports ph 2 1000RaseT ports wer ISET Hwa Serta LINNEMR 44000 End The following table describes the Base Unit Info tab fields Table 118 Base Unit Info tab fields Field Type Descr Ver SerNum LstChng The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state
94. use the unit port convention with a standalone Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series as long as the unit number is 1 Accessing CLI You access the CLI using Telnet or through a direct connection to the switch from a terminal or personal computer PC You can use any terminal or PC with a terminal emulator as the CLI command station Make sure that the terminal has the following features e 9600 bits per second b s 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity no flow control e Serial terminal emulation program such as Terminal or Hyperterm for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows NT e Cable and connector to match the male DTE connector DB 9 on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Console port with the DCE DTE switch on the switch management module set to DTE e VT100 Arrows checked in the Terminal Preferences window under Terminal Options and Block Cursor unchecked VT 100 ANSI checked under Emulation To access CLI use the following procedure Step Action 1 When you access the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series the following banner appears Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series banner nnn NUH HES NUHNHHHHHH PERERA BR HEH GELEI HER HHRRNRERHERHH HENNRRHHERHH HHNHERHRHBNNH Bannan HHH nun nnn nnu nun Se nun nun nun nut nnn Hae Hae wth Hih hhh Hit HRR HERRREEHEHHI itt henna tit wee RN nuE wer NNN HantE nun Henne nun nnn HHHH HH nun Hu nun nan Hae HHH ttt ut unu nni nan nut nun nun nun nung nnnannnnnunni
95. va Swan Rowdee rade Try E tes a aya aao ww WILLE EJ sc My Ba aiee Stack Info tab fields page 263 describes the Stack Info tab fields Stack Info tab fields Field Description Descr A description of the component or subcomponent If not available the value is a zero length string Location The geographic location of a component in a system modeled as a chassis but possibly physically implemented with geographically separate devices connected together to exchange management information Chassis modeled in this manner are sometimes referred to as virtual chassis An example value is 4th flr wiring closet in blg A Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 264 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Description ATTENTION 1 This field is applicable only to components that can be found in either the Board or Unit groups If the information is unavailable for example the chassis is not modeling a virtual chassis or component is not in Board or Unit group the value is a zero length string 2 If this field is applicable and is not assigned a value through a SNMP SET PDU when the row is created the value defaults to the value of the object s5ChasComSerNum LstChng The value of sysUpTime when it was detected that the component sub c
96. variables Figure 75 show clock summer time page 215 displays sample output from the show clock summer time command Figure 75 show clock summer time 2556T PWRE show clock summer time ylight saving time is DISABLED Da 255 T PWR Enabling Autopology You can enable the Optivity Autopology protocol using the CLI See www nortel com support for information on Autopology The product family for Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet This section covers the following commands e autotopology commana page 216 e no autotopology command page 216 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 216 System configuration using the CLI e default autotopology commana page 216 autotopology command The autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol The syntax for the autotopology command is autotopology The autotopology command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The autotopology command has no parameters or values no autotopology command The no autotopology command disables the Autotopology protocol The syntax for the no autotopology command is no autotopology The no autotopology command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no autotopology command has no parameters or values default autotopology command T
97. you enable or disable sending traps if the switch power ControlEnable usage exceeds the percentage set in the UsageThreshold field ii acti Lets you set the power detection type that the switch uses elect ype to detect a request for power from a device connected to all ports on the switch 802 3af 802 3af and legacy ATTENTION The default setting is 802 3af Ensure that this setting matches the setting for the detection type used by the powered devices on this switch Device Manager display for PoE ports The Device Manager displays PoE ports differently than non PoE port ERS 2550T PWR with PoE ports Device Manager 609b06 192 167 120 29 Device _ Edit Graph VLAN QoS Rmon _ Actions Help 6 5 2 8 8 9 B os NORTEL 2550T PWR B 6b WT 9 223 OS ft 28 BH 33 3 Or OB OH OH Speed A W 82 Fact Downf 5 7 T MODE Iie J J i ot oH J Standalone 51 52 gt Base lt Z Stacking Down Up Console Stitus J J He g ii iai j Pwr F Eg The port coloring scheme for the data aspect is the same for PoE ports as for all other ports The difference for the PoE ports is the addition of the power aspect colored p Table 45 Port power color codes page 174 shows the status assigned to each color Table 45 Port power color codes Green P Specifies that the port is currently delivering power Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 0
98. 00 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 48 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Cascade Down port The Cascade Down port is used to connect this switch unit to the next unit in the stack through a stack cable A connection from this port must be attached to the Cascade Up port of the next switch in the stack A return cable from the Cascade Down port of the last unit must be connected to the Cascade Up port of the first unit to complete the stack connection ATTENTION Each Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switch is supplied with one 46 cm stack cable to create a stack connection For stacking three or more units maximum 8 units per stack you need to order the 1 5 or 3 meters stack return cable order number AL2518002 E6 and AL2518003 E6 respectively Cascade Up port The Cascade Up port is used to accept a stack cable connection from an adjacent unit above A return cable from the Cascade Up port of the first unit must be connected to the Cascade Down port of the last unit to complete a stack connection ATTENTION Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches use tested and certified Category 5E UTP cables as stack cables All Nortel branded ERS 2500 series stack cables are for use with these switches However Cat 5E stack cable connections of up to 100 meters is possible between each ERS 2500 switch but not officially supported Using non Nortel tested a
99. 007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 364 Appendix D Command List Command qos egressmap ds lt 0 63 gt 1p lt 0 7 gt qos egressmap enable radius server host lt address gt secondary host lt address gt port lt num gt key lt string gt timeout lt 1 60 gt radius server password fallback rate limit multicast lt pct gt broadcast lt pct gt both lt pct gt reload force minutes to wait lt 1 60 gt cancel restore factory default y rmon alarm lt 1 65535 gt lt WORD gt lt 1 214 7483647 gt absolute delta rising threshold lt 2147483648 2147483647 gt lt 1 65535 gt falling threshold lt 2147483648 2147483647 gt lt 1 65535 gt owner lt LINE gt rmon event lt 1 65535 gt log trap description lt LINE gt owner lt LINE gt Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration Quality of Service NN47215 504 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration Quality of Service NN47215 504 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 rate limit commana page 243 reload command page 93 Resetting the switch to default configuration page 184 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet R
100. 007 Nortel Networks 65 System configuration software features This chapter describes the software features used for system configuration on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series It includes information about the following topics x ref to switch management features x ref to ethernet port management features x ref to other features Switch management features Configuration and switch management The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series that is shipped directly from the factory is ready to operate in any 10BASE T or 100BASE TX standard network You must assign an IP address to the switch You can set both addresses by using the Console port or BootP which resides on the switch You can manage the switch using Command Line Interface CLI The CLI is used to automate general management and configuration of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Use the CLI through a Telnet connection or through the serial port on the console See CLI Basics page 81 for more information Java based Device Manager Device Manager is a Java based set of graphical network management applications used to configure and manage an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series See Getting Started with Device Manager page 101 for more information Web based management You can manage the network from the World Wide Web Access the web based Graphical User Interface GUI through the Embedded Web Server EWS the HTML based browser located on your ne
101. 053 Port 1 PortId MAC address 66 19 69 af c8 61 Port Desc Port 1 PortIa MAC address 06 19 69 af c8 62 Port Desc Port 2 l PortIa MAC address 066 19 69 af c8 63 Port Desc Port 3 Porta MAC address 06 19 69 af c8 04 Port Desc Port 4 Potra MAC address 66 19 69 af c8 5 Port Desc Port 5 m More q Quit space return Cont inue gt Figure 79 show lIldp mgmt sys data command output page 225 displays the output from the show Ildp mgmt sys data command Figure 79 show Ildp mgmt sys data command output 526T gt show lldp 2 1ab configuration TxInterval 36 TxHoldMultiplier 4 ReInitDelay 2 TxDelay 2 NotificationInterval 5 526T gt show lldp mgmt sys data igmtAddr Mgmt IfId MgmtAddrOID ip 4 192 167 126 28 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 72 1 526T gt Figure 80 show Ildp stats command output page 226 displays the output from the show lldp stats command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 226 System configuration using the CLI I ______ LLL ee Figure 80 show Ildp stats command output 2526Titshow lldp stats lldp stats bascehangs RenTable RenTable RenTable RemTable Time Inserts Deletes rops Ageouts B days 00 00 80 a a 6 i 252614 show Ildp port command The show 11dp port command displays configuration data for LLDP ports The syntax for the show
102. 12 System configuration using the CLI Table 72 sntp sync interval command parameters and variables Parameters and variables lt 0 168 gt Description Enter the number of hours you want for periodic synchronization with the NTP server ATTENTION 0 is boot time only and 168 is once a week the default value is 24 hours default sntp command The default sntp command sets the SNTP parameters to their default values The syntax for the default sntp command is default sntp enable server sync interval The default sntp command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 73 default sntp command parameters and variables page 212 describes the parameters and variables for the default sntp command Table 73 default sntp command parameters and variables Parameters and eure Description variables enable Disables SNTP server Clears stored SNTP server addresses sync interval Restores the default SNTP re synchronization interval Setting local time zone SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time UTC for all time synchronizations so it is not affected by different time zones In order for the switch report the correct time for your local time zone and daylight savings time you must use the following commands e clock time zone page 213 e no clock time zone page 213 e clock summer time page 213 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Co
103. 192 You can set the speed at one of the five options shown 00 38400 default is 9600 length Sets the length of the terminal display in characters default is 24 width Sets the width of the terminal displaying characters default 79 show cli command The show cli command displays the current CLI settings The syntax for the show cli command is show cli info mode password type The show cli command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 59 show cli command parameters and variables page 194 describes the parameters and variables for the show cli command Table 59 show cli command parameters and variables Parameters and variables info Displays general Console settings mode Displays CLI mode password Description Displays CLI user names and passwords type Displays password types Figure 64 show cli command output page 195 displays the output from the show cli command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Customizing your system 195 Figure 64 show cli command output 526T config t nter configuration commands one per line End with CNTL Z 526T lt config gt show cli info Inactivity Timeout 15 minute lt s gt ogin Timeout 1 minute lt s gt ogin Retries 3 lore True creen Lines 23 526T lt conf ig gt D
104. 2 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 80 System configuration software features e RFC 1493 Bridge MIB e RFC 1573 Interface MIB e RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB e RFC 1757 RMON e RFC 1271 RMON e RFC 1157 SNMP Standards The following IEEE Standards also contain information germane to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series e IEEE 802 1D Standard for Spanning Tree Protocol e IEEE 802 3 Ethernet e IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks CLI Basics You can manage the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series with the following management tools e Device Manager GUI e Web based management system e Command Line Interface CLI The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Command Line Interface CLI is a management tool that provides methods for configuring managing and monitoring the operational functions of the switch You can access CLI through a console terminal directly connected to the switch Console port remotely through a dial up modem connection in band through a Telnet session For a complete alphabetical list of CLI commands see Appendix Command List page 353 You can use the CLI interactively or you can load and execute CLI scripts CLI scripts are loaded in one of the following ways e Entering the c
105. 2 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 50 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking ATTENTION Many network management software packages assume a cascade down stack down configuration Nortel recommends the usage of this configuration Cascade down stack configuration O 5 ae unit 1 Unit 2 bel Unit 3 be Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8 1 Base Unit 2 Last Unit 3 Stack cable 4 Stack cable used for return In a cascade up stack up configuration the base unit is physically located as the top unit in the stack The cable connected to the Cascade Down connector of the base unit terminates in the Cascade Up connector physically located at the bottom of the stack This next unit is designated Unit 2 The stack is wired upward through the units and the system continues to number in this manner throughout the stack In this configuration the base unit discovers the stack in a cascade up stack up direction The following illustration demonstrates a cascade up stack up configuration Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stack configuration 51 Cascade up stack configuration Unit 1 Unit 8 Unit 7 Unit 6 Unit 5 Unit 4 Unit 3 Unit 2 1 Base Unit 2 Las
106. 2 6 0 4 000 3 6 8 a 68 g 6 8 a 4 008 6 6 a 4 608 6 49 9 86 4 300 6 8 a 4 608 g 6 6 a 6 008 6 8 a 4 608 18 6 6 a 4 006 Ai 6 8 a 4 008 12 6 6 a 4 000 13 6 8 a 4 000 4 6 6 a 4 000 5 6 8 a 4 608 6 6 8 a 4 0008 6 8 a 4 008 8 6 8 a 4 008 9 6 8 4 008 a 6 8 4 008 More q Quit space return Cont inue gt Configuring PoE using web based management You can display and configure Power over Ethernet PoE parameters using the web based management system e Displaying and configuring power management for the switch page 168 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 168 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR e Displaying and configuring power management for the ports page 170 Displaying and configuring power management for the switch To display and configure power settings for the entire switch use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt PoE Management gt Global Power Mgmt The Global Power Management page appears Global Power Management page page 168 Global Power Management page Configuration gt Power Management gt Global Power Management Global Power Management Available DTE Power 168 Watt DTE Power Status Normal DTE Power Consumption 0 Watt DTE Power U
107. 2 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager 175 Color Description Red P Specifies that the power and detection mechanism for the port is disabled Orange P Specifies that the power and detection mechanism for the port is enabled However the port is not currently delivering power White Gray P Specifies that the power and detection mechanism for the port is unknown ATTENTION The coloring scheme for data aspect and the power aspect are independent of each other With this GUI enhancement you can view the initial status for both data and power aspect for the port PoE tab for ports The PoE tab lets you configure PoE power settings for ports To view the PoE tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the port you want to edit 2 Do one of the following e Double click the selected port e From the shortcut menu choose Edit From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Port e On the toolbar click Edit The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed 3 Click the PoE tab The PoE tab appears Edit Port dialog box PoE tab 192 167 120 29 Port 1 5 Interface VLAN STG EAPOL EAPOL Advance PoE Lacp anac IV AdminEnable DetectionStatus searching PowerClassifications classO PowerPriority critical high low Refresh Close Help
108. 2 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on Windows 109 10 Select the desired shortcut path from the list provided 11 Click Next The Pre Installation Summary dialog box appears A summary of the choices you have made is displayed for confirmation Pre Installation Summary dialog box 2 Java Device manager sl Pre installation Summary A Introd Please Review the Following Before Continuing Product Name Java Device Manager _ 7 Choose Install Sets Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre installation Summary Install Folder C Program Files NortelJDM installing Shortcut Folder s C Documents and Settings Start Menu Programs NortelJava Device Manager Disk Space Information for installation Target Required 147 537 114 bytes Available 11 857 645 568 bytes a P a aeos rsa 12 Verify the folder shortcut and disk space required to install the software If necessary click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes 13 Click Install The installation process begins When the installation is complete the Install Complete dialog box appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 110 Getting Started with Device Manager Install Complete dialog box SD Java Device Man
109. 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager 173 Edit Unit dialog box PoE tab for a single unit 192 167 120 29 Unit 1 Unit Rate Limit POE Rear Ports Mode Power 168 watts OperStatus on ConsumptionPower 4 watts UsageThreshold fo 1 99 IV NotificationControlEnable PoweredDeviceDetectType C 802 3af 802 3afAndLegacySupport Fony Refresh Close Help End Table 44 PoE tab items for a single unit page 173 describes the PoE tab items for a single unit Table 44 PoE tab items for a single unit Item Description Power Displays the total power available to the switch OperStatus Displays the power state of the switch e on e off e faulty Consumption Displays the power being used by the switch Power UsageThreshold Lets you set a percentage of the total power usage of the switch above which the system sends a trap ATTENTION You must enable the traps NotificationControlEnable to receive a power usage trap Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 174 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR Item Description Notification Lets
110. 25501 PWR HWOA Serial UBNNTMILA7000H Operational State Mac Address IP Address 192 167 120 239 Fans Status Fant R Fan R Fand R Fant R Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR 24 10 100BaseTX with PoE plus 24 10 100BaseTX phos 2 10 100 1000 SFP combo ports plus 2 1000GaseT ports Table 33 Switch Information page fields page 153 describes the fields on the Switch Information page Table 33 Switch Information page fields Item Description Module Description The factory set description of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Pluggable Port 25 49 The factory set description of the sub component GBIC Pluggable Port 26 50 The factory set description of the sub component GBIC Firmware Version The firmware version of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Software Version The version of the running software Manufacturing Data Code The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 4 1 19 November 2007 154 Using the Web based management interface nn Treen ee Item Description Hardware Version The hardware version of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Serial The serial number of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Operational State The current operational state of the device The operational states are Other Not Av
111. 3162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 356 Appendix D Command List Command default radius server host key password port secondary host timeout default rate limit default snmp server authentication trap Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 default rate limit commana page 244 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 default snmp server community ro rw default snmp server contact default snmp server host default snmp server location default snmp server name default snmp trap link status port lt portlist gt default sntp enable server sync interval default spanning tree port lt portlist gt learning cost priority default speed port lt portlist gt default ssh dsa auth pass auth port timeout default telnet access default tftp server default vlan configcontrol Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing
112. 4 Interface statistics for multiple ports 192 168 249 21 Graph Port 1 7 x interac r e To change the type of statistics displayed select a different type from the show list at the bottom of the dialog box The statistics are updated based on the poll interval shown at the bottom of the dialog box You can select a different polling interval Buttons for bar pie and line graphs are located at the bottom of a statistics dialog box See the next section Viewing statistics as graphs page 138 for instructions to use these buttons You can export the statistics to a tab separated file format and import the file into other applications To export the information use the Export Data button below the table B Types of statistics page 134 e Viewing statistics as graphs page 138 Viewing statistics as graphs To create a graph for an object use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the object or objects to be graphed 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Graph Selected m Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Working with statistics and graphs 139 From the shortcut menu for the object choose Graph e From the main menu choose Graph gt Chassis or Graph gt Port A statistics dialog box appears with tabs fo
113. 500 Series uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb s megabits per second or at 100 Mb s depending on the connecting device These ports support the IEEE 802 3u autonegotiation standard which means that when a port is connected to another device that also supports the IEEE 802 3u standard the two devices negotiate the best speed and duplex mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 27 The 10BASE T 100BASE TX switch ports also support half and full duplex mode operation The 10BASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 switch ports can connect to 10 Mb s or 100 Mb s Ethernet segments or nodes ATTENTION Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cable connections when connecting 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports Auto MDI MDI X The 10 100BASE TX port connectors support auto MDI MDI X Typical MDI X ports connect over straight through cables to the Network Interface Card NIC in a node or server similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub However with the auto MDI MDI X feature you can still use straight through cables while connecting to an Ethernet hub or switch The auto MDI MDI X feature is dependent on the autonegotiation feature If autonegotiation is enabled on a port the auto MDI MDI X feature is automatically
114. 505 ssh pass auth Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ssh port lt 1 65535 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ssh secure force Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ssh timeout lt 1 120 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 telnet access enable disable login timeout Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt 1 10 gt retry lt 1 100 gt inactive timeout lt 0 60 gt Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 logging nonelaccess failures all source ip lt 1 10 gt lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt mask lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt terminal speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 terminal command page 193 length lt 1 132 gt width lt 1 132 gt tftp server lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt tftp server command page 198 username lt username gt lt password gt ro rw Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 vlan configcontrol lt vcc_option gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 Novemb
115. 526T gt show lldp tx stats we Seeqqcegqceggqeggq0gqg0g0a More q Quit space return Cont inue gt Figure 85 show lldp port tx tlv command output page 229 displays the output from the show Ildp stats command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Upgrading software 229 Figure 85 show Ildp port tx tlv command output 2526T gt show 1ldp tx tlv 4 false false false false false 2 false false false false false 3 false false false false false 4 false false false false false 5 false false false false false 6 false false false false false 7 false false false false false 8 false false false false false 9 false false false false false 18 false false false false false 1 false false false false false 2 false false false false false 3 false false false false false 14 false false false false false 15 false false false false false false fals s false false Et hore Cq Quit space return Continue Configuring LEDs to blink on the display panel With the blink leds command you can set the LEDs on the display panel to blink to identify a particular unit The syntax for the blink leds command is blink leds off time lt 1 10 gt The blink 1eds command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 89 blink leds command parameters and variables
116. 55 0 gw 192 0 1 0 The following sample entry describes a BootP client bay1 ht ethernet ha 0060 d000000 ip 192 0 0 1 hd c ezlan images bf BS425 24T_100 img Where host name bayl hardware type Ethernet MAC address 00 60 FD 00 00 00 IP address 192 0 0 0 home directory of boot file c ezlan images boot file bps2000_100 img globali1 ht ethernet hd c opt images sm 255 255 255 0 gw 192 0 1 0 The following sample entry describes a BootP client bay1 ht ethernet ha 0060fd000000 ip 192 0 0 1 hd c ezlan images bf Hummingbird_3 5_100 img Where host name bayl hardware type Ethernet MAC address 00 60 FD 00 00 00 IP address 192 0 0 0 home directory of boot file c ezlan images boot file hummingbird_3 5_100 img FE FE FE FE FE TE OTE Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 353 Appendix D Command List This appendix provides the complete CLI command list in alphabetical order with approximate page references for the beginning pages of further explanations ATTENTION This information is presented for reference only and must not be considered to be an exact representation Table 156 CLI command list Command Page No auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt 10 full 10 half 100 full
117. 62 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Customizing your system 199 no tftp server command The no tf tp server command clears the TFTP server IP address to 0 0 0 0 The syntax of the no tftp server command is no tftp server The no tf tp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no tf tp server command has no parameters or values default tftp server command The default tf tp server command sets the TFTP server IP address to 0 0 0 0 The syntax of the default tftp server command is default tftp server The default tftp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default tftp server command has no parameters or values copy config tftp command The copy config tftp command copies the current configuration file onto the TFTP server The syntax for the copy config tftp command is copy config tftp address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt filename lt WORD gt The copy config tftp command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 63 copy config tftp command parameters and variables page 199 describes the parameters and variables for the copy config tftp command Table 63 copy config tftp command parameters and variables Parameters and Hes ilotion variables p address lt XXX XXX X Specifies the TFTP server IP address enter in XX XXX gt dotted decimal notation filename lt WORD gt Specifies filename th
118. 6T PWR MAC Address 16 000 entries Database Size Addressing 48 bit MAC address Network protocol and standards compatibility The following are protocols and standards used by the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series e IEEE 802 3 10BASE T ISO IEC 8802 3 Clause 14 e IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX ISO IEC 8802 3 Clause 25 e IEEE 802 3u Autonegotiation on Twisted Pair ISO IEC 8802 3 Clause 28 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Electromagnetic emissions 377 IEEE 802 3x Flow Control on the Gigabit Uplink ports IEEE 802 3z Gigabit IEEE 802 1d MAC Bridges ISO IEC 10038 IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1D Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 3ad LACP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 1AB Link Layer Discovery Safety agency certification The safety certifications follow for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series UL 60950 IEC 60950 CB report and certificate with all national deviations EN 60950 CSA 22 2 No 60950950 UL 94 V1 flammability requirements for PC board NOM NOM 019 Electromagnetic emissions The electromagnetic emission standards for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series CISPR 22 Class A CISPR 24 Class A US CFR47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A Canada ICES 003
119. 7215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 359 Command logging remote address lt A B C D gt logging remote enable logging remote level criticallinformational serious none logout mac address table aging time lt time gt Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 logout command page 90 mac address table aging time commana page 99 mac security disable enable filtering enable disable intrusion detect enable disable forever intrusion timer lt 1 65535 gt learning ports lt portlist gt add lt portlist gt remove lt portlist gt learning enable disable mac address table mac da f ilter security list snmp lock enable disable snmp trap enable disable mac security port lt portlist gt disable enable learning mac security mac address table address lt H H H gt port lt portlist gt security list lt 1 32 gt mac security mac da filter add lt H H H gt delete lt H H H gt mac security security list lt 1 32 gt add lt portlist gt remove lt portlist gt lt portlist gt mit lt id gt name lt tr
120. 85 ping command 185 ip name server command 186 no ip name server command 187 ip domain name command 187 no ip domain name command 188 default ip domain name command 188 Configuration Management 188 Automatically loading Configuration file 188 ASCII Configuration Generator 191 Customizing your system 193 Setting the terminal 193 Displaying system information 195 Setting boot parameters 196 Setting TFTP parameters 197 Customizing the opening banner 200 Displaying the ARP table 202 Displaying interfaces 202 show interfaces command 202 show interfaces config command 204 Saving the configuration to NVRAM 205 copy config nvram command 205 write memory command 205 save config command 206 Enabling and disabling autosave 206 show autosave command 206 autosave enable command 207 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 10 Contents no autosave enable command 207 default autosave enable command 207 Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol 208 show sntp command 208 sntp enable command 209 no sntp enable command 209 sntp server primary address command 209 sntp server secondary address command 210 no sntp server command 210 sntp sync now command 211 sntp sync interval command 211 default sntp command 212 Setting local time zone 212 clock time zone 213 n
121. 9 November 2007 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 02 02 Standard Opening a device 123 Description Device Manager default properties You cannot modify this field when configuring the per device properties Application Launch Telnet Default Telnet is the one that comes with the from JDM operating system To define a specific Telnet select User Defined and specify the Telnet path and parameters Default SSH is the one bundled with in the JDM To define a specific SSH select User Defined and specify the SSH client path and parameters e Opening a device page 123 Opening a device Opening a device displays the device view a picture of the device To open the device view you must enter community strings that determine the access level granted to the device Table 18 SNMP community string default values page 123 describes the default access community strings for the Device Manager software Table 18 SNMP community string default values To display the device view use the following procedure Step Action 1 Do one of the following e Choose Device gt Open e Choose Device gt Open Last by SNMPv1 v2 and select an IP address from the list e For previously opened SNMPv3 enabled devices choose Device gt Open Last by SNMPv3 and select an IP address from the list e Click the folder icon in the Device Manager window Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview
122. DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY The foregoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and or supplier of the Software Such developer and or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and in such event they may not apply 4 General a If Customer is the United States Government the following paragraph shall apply All Nortel Networks Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation and in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States Government the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U S Federal Regulations at 48 C F R Sections 12 212 for non DoD entities and 48 C F R 227 7202 for DoD entities b Customer may terminate the license at any time Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license In either event upon termination Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction Customer is respo
123. DP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 286 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 2 Click the Port tab The Port tab appears Figure 101 LLDP Port tab 192 167 120 28 LLOP MEEA The following table describes the Port tab fields Table 129 Port tab fields Field PortNum AdminStatus Description Port number The administratively desired status of the local LLDP agent txOnly the LLDP agent transmits LLDP frames on this port and does not store any information about the remote systems to which it is connected rxOnly the LLDP agent receives but does not transmit LLDP frames on this port txAndRx the LLDP agent transmits and receives LLDP frames on this port disabled the LLDP agent does not transmit or receive LLDP frames on this port If the port receives remote systems information which is stored in other tables before AdminStatus is disabled the information ages out Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 19 November 2007 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 02 02 Standard Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 287 Field Description NotificationEnable Controls on a per port basis whether notifications f
124. End Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web To install the JDM software to a UNIX Solaris environment from the web use the following procedure Step Action 1 Go to the following URL www nortel com support Select the software support page for your product The software page appears Click the Java Device Manager version you want The Software Detail Information page appears Download the JDM software for your operating environment to a desired directory on your system The software download is a self extracting sh file Once the file transfer is complete continue with the next step Close all programs Navigate to the directory on your system where you loaded the JDM software Make the installation file executable For the Solaris environment make the file executable by entering chmod a x dm xxxx solaris sparc sh For the Linux environment make the file executable by entering chmod a x jdm xxxx linux sh Run the installation file For the Solaris environment run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc sh file For the Linux environment run the jdm_xxxx_linux sh file See Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux page 113 End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 113 Executing the JDM installation soft
125. I Config File tab fields page 274 describes the ASCII Config File tab fields Table 123 ASCII Config File tab fields Field Description o O LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the ASCII configuration file If not used then the value is 0 0 0 0 ASCIIConfigFileName Name of the ASCII configuration file currently associated with the interface When not used the value is a zero length string ASCIIConfigAutoDownload Specifies automatic ASCII configuration download ASCIIConfigAutodldStatus Specifies the current status of the ASCII configuration file download ASCIIConfigManualDownload Specifies manual download of an ASCII configuration file ASClIConfigManualdidStatus Specifies the current status of the manual download of an ASCII configuration file ASClIConfigManualUpload Specifies manual upload of an ASCII configuration file ASClIConfigManualUpldStatus Specifies the current status of the manual upload of an ASCII configuration file Save Configuration tab You can use the Save Configuration tab to save the switch configuration to NVRAM To open the Save Configuration tab use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Working with configuration files 275 Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt File System The Fi
126. IP The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the BootP or Default IP mode the default mode as follows e After the switch is reset or power cycled if the switch has a configured IP address other than 0 0 0 0 or the default IP address then the switch uses the configured IP address e If the configured IP address is 0 0 0 0 or the default IP address 192 168 1 1 24 then the switch attempts BootP for 1 minute e If BootP succeeds then the switch uses the IP information provided f BootP fails and the configured IP address is the default then the switch uses the default IP address 192 168 1 1 24 f BootP fails and the configured IP address is 0 0 0 0 then the switch retains this address BootP Always This option lets you manage the switch that is configured with the IP address obtained from the BootP server The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the BootP Always mode as follows e The switch continues to broadcast BootP requests regardless of whether an in band IP address is set from the console terminal e Ifthe switch receives a BootP reply that contains an in band IP address the switch uses this new in band IP address Ifthe BootP server is not reachable you cannot change the in band IP address until the BootP mode is set to BootP Disabled However after a period of a few minutes appoximately 10 minutes the switch automatically enters the BootP Disabled mode You can then configure
127. Ildp status command page 223 e default Ildp status command page 223 show Ildp command page 224 e show Ildp port command page 226 lidp command The 11dp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters The syntax for the Ildp command is lidp tx interval lt 5 32768 gt tx hold multiplier lt 2 10 gt reinit delay lt 1 10 gt tx delay lt 1 8192 gt notification interval lt 5 3600 gt The 11dp command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 76 Iidp command parameters and variables page 218 describes the parameters and variables for the Ildp command Table 76 Ildp command parameters and variables Parameters and varlables Description tx interval Sets the interval between successive transmission cycles lt 5 32768 gt tx hold multiplier Sets the multiplier for tx interval used to compute the Time lt 2 10 gt To Live value for the TTL TLV reinit delay Sets the delay for re initialization attempt if the adminStatus lt 1 10 gt is disabled tx delay lt 1 8192 Sets the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame gt transmissions notification interva Sets the interval between successive transmissions of LLDP lt 5 3600 gt notifications Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using the CLI 219 default
128. IldpTxDelay indicates the delay in seconds between successive LLDP frame transmissions initiated by value or status changes in the LLDP local systems MIB The recommended value for the lldpTxDelay is set by the following formula 1 lt IldpTxDelay lt 0 25 lldpMessageTxlnterval I dpNotificationInterval This object controls the transmission of LLDP notifications The agent must not generate more than one l dpRemTablesChange notification event in the indicated period where a notification event is the transmission of a single notification PDU type to a list of notification destinations If additional changes in Ildp RemoteSystemsData object groups occur within the indicated throttling period these trap events must be suppressed by the agent An NMS must periodically check the value of lI dpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any missed IldpRemTablesChange notification events for example due to throttling or transmission loss If notification Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 284 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Description transmission is enabled for particular ports the suggested default throttling period is 5 seconds RemTablesLast The value of the sysUpTime object ChangeTime defined in IETF RFC 3418 at the time an entry is created modified or dele
129. Issue 3 Class A Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3548 Class A Japan VCCI class A Taiwan CNS 13438 Class A Europe EN55022 Class A and EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 378 Appendix E Technical specifications e EN61000 4 2 EN61000 4 3 EN61000 4 4 EN61000 4 5 EN61000 4 6 EN61000 4 8 EN61000 4 11 Electromagnetic immunity The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series meets the EN50082 1 1997 standard Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 379 Index A AbsoluteValue statistics 134 AC power 169 AC Power Status 169 access 86 access levels accessing the CLI 86 Action field 273 Actions menu 127 Addr field 254 Addresses tab 254 AdminDuplex field 306 310 AdminEnable field 176 administrative options logging out 316 resetting the switch 315 315 resetting to system defaults 316 security configuring passwords 314 AdminSpeed field 307 310 AdminState 262 AdminState field 264 AdminStatus field 306 309 age out time 98 Agent tab 265 266 Alarm Manager button 128 AllowedRatePps field 251 alphabetical list of commands 353 Application launch with ring tone 122 Area Chart button 140 area graph example 136
130. LLDP agent on the indicated port End Graphing LLDP transmit statistics Use the following procedure to graph LLDP transmit statistics Step Action 1 From the TX Stats tab select the port for which you want to display statistics 2 Click Graph The TX Stats Graph dialog box appears 192 168 249 46 LLDP Port 1 1 x amam elas Clear Counters Help Poll Interval 10s Oday 00h 05m 34s 3 Highlight a data column to graph 4 Click one of the graph buttons End FFL LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 289 RX Stats tab With the RX Stats tab you can view LLDP receive statistics by port Use the following procedure to open the RX Stats tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the RX Stats tab The RX Stats tab appears Figure 103 RX Stats tab re sisisleicloloisic sic olsicisicisicicio os Xsis sleje s ojslsloje s s lsislsjsjo s sjo 3 ololojojo ojolojolololo a ojololojojojojojo 2ololoioloj ol olol j l l l l iol l j l l 3 ol9l 9 9 s 9 l ol l l lo o j EEAS The following
131. M on Windows from the web 104 Executing the JDM installation software on Windows 105 Installing JOM on UNIX or Linux 110 Minimum requirements 111 Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD 111 Installing JDM on Linux from the CD 111 Installing JOM on UNIX or Linux from the web 112 Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux 113 Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments 118 Device Manager basics 119 Starting Device Manager 119 Setting the Device Manager properties 120 Opening a device 123 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 8 Contents Device Manager window 126 Menu bar 127 Toolbar 127 Device view 128 Shortcut menus 131 Status bar 133 Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes 133 Editing objects 133 Working with statistics and graphs 134 Types of statistics 134 Types of graphs 135 Statistics for single and multiple objects 137 Viewing statistics as graphs 138 Telnet session 140 Opening an SSH connection to the device 140 Opening the web based management home page 141 Trap log 142 Online Help 143 Using the Web based management interface 145 Requirements 145 Logging in to the web based management interface 146 Menu 147 Management page 149 Viewing stack information 151 Viewing summary information 153 Changing stack numbering 154 Identifying unit numbers 155 Power ov
132. M software is installed 2 Open the UninstallerData sub folder 3 Run the following file Uninstall Java Device Manager exe ATTENTION If more than one version of Device Manager software is installed ensure you select the correct software to uninstall End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 104 Getting Started with Device Manager Installing JDM on Windows from the CD To access the JDM software from the installation CD Step Action 1 Close all programs 2 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 From the Windows Start menu choose Run The Run dialog box appears 4 Use Browse to navigate to the drive where the CD ROM is located 5 On the CD ROM drive locate the Windows Device Manager subdirectory 6 Double click the jdm_xxxx exe file ATTENTION In the file name xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on Windows page 105 End Installing JDM on Windows from the web To obtain the JDM software from the Nortel web site use the following procedure Step Action 1 Go to the following URL www nortel com support Select the software support page for your product The software page appears Click the Java Device Manager version you want The Software Detail Inform
133. N47215 505 interface commana page 91 ip address command page 178 ip bootp server command page 196 ip domain name commana page 187 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 358 Appendix D Command List Command Page No ip default gateway lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt ip default gateway command page 180 ip name server lt A B C D gt ip name server command page 186 ipmgr source ip lt 1 10 gt lt XXX XXX XXX XXX Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series gt mask lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ipmgr telnet snmp http source ip Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt 1 10 gt lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt mask Security Configuration and Management lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt NN47215 505 lacp aggregation port lt portlist gt enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lacp clear stats port lt WORD gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lacp key port lt portlist gt lt 1 4095 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lacp mode port lt portli
134. Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 320 Configuring the switch using web based management Figure 118 IP page Configuration gt IP IP Setting es Configurable In Use Last BootP BootP Request Mode BootP or Default IP In Band Stack IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Switch IP Address fi 92 167 120 28 192 167 120 28 0 0 0 0 In Band Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway fi 92 167 120 1 192 167 120 1 0 0 0 0 K Submit d The following table describes the items on the IP page Table 142 IP page items Boot Mode BootP BootP or Default IP default Choose this mode to inform the Setting Request switch to send a BootP request Mode when the switch IP address stored in nonvolatile memory is the factory default value If the stored IP address differs from the factory default value the switch uses the stored network parameters If the switch cannot find a BootP server it tries five more times to find one and then defaults to the factory settings BootP Always Choose this mode to inform the switch to ignore any stored network parameters and send a BootP request each time it boots If the BootP request fails the switch boots with the factory default IP configuration This setting disables remote management if no BootP server is set u
135. Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show sys info show sys info command page 96 show tech show tech commana page 97 show telnet access Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show terminal show terminal command page 193 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Command show tftp server Appendix D Command List 369 Page No show tftp server command page 198 show vlan configcontrol show vlan igmp lt 1 4094 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration IP Multicast NN47215 503 show vlan interface info lt portlist gt show vlan interface vids lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show vlan multicast membership lt 1 4094 gt show vlan vid lt 1 4094 gt shutdown force minutes to wait lt 1 60 gt cancel shutdown port lt portlist gt snmp server enable disable
136. Port tab 285 TX Stats tab 287 Graphing LLDP transmit statistics 288 RX Stats tab 289 Graphing LLDP receive statistics 291 Local System tab 291 Local Port tab 292 Local Management tab 294 Neighbor tab 295 Neighbor Mgmt Address tab 297 Unknown TLV tab 299 Organizational Defined Info tab 300 Configuring ports using Device Manager 303 Viewing and editing a single port configuration 303 Interface tab for a single port 304 Viewing and editing multiple port configurations 307 Interface tab for multiple ports 308 Administering the switch using web based management 311 Viewing system information 311 Quick Start 312 Configuring system security 314 Rebooting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 315 Changing the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to system defaults 316 Logging out of the management interface 316 Configuring the switch using web based management 319 Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings 319 LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Contents 13 nT eee ee ee ee Modifying system settings 322 Configuring switch port status 324 Configuring high speed flow control 327 Downloading switch images 328 Downloading ASCII configuration files 330 Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server 331 Requirements for storing and retrieving configuration
137. Priority HEX 0x0000 0xF000 Barn o Roorpanoa ooo Default Path Cost Type e 32 bits in MSTP RSTP mode e 16 bits in legacy STP802 1d mode e Not supported in STP802 1d mode TELNET Access Enabled SNMP Access Enabled Web Access Enabled Yes Login Timeout 1 minute Login Retries Inactivity Timeout 15 minutes Event Logging A Allowed Source IP Address First field 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned 10 user configurable fields Remaining nine fields 255 255 255 255 Allowed Source Mask First field 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned 10 user configurable fields Remaining nine fields 255 255 255 255 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix B Default settings 349 Field Default setting Image Filename Zero length string Diagnostics Filename Zero length string TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Start TFTP Load of New Image No Configuration Image Filename Zero length string TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Retrieve Configuration Image from Server No TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Auto Configuration on Reset Disabled Operational Mode of rear ports for Stacking Mode pre enabled units Operational Mode of rear ports for non Standalone Mode pre enabled units Nortel Ethernet Routing Swit
138. RAM If you reset the switch to default this removes the license from the switch But the stacking feature is enabled until you configure the switch to Standalone Mode The syntax for the copy tftp license command is copy tftp license lt A B C D gt lt WORD gt The copy tftp license command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode copy tftp license command parameters page 41 describes the parameters and variables for the copy tftp license command copy tftp license command parameters Parameters and variables lt A B C D gt The TFTP server address lt WORD gt The software license filename on the TFTP server Description Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 42 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking show license command The show license command displays the existing licenses on your switch The syntax for the show license command is show license lt 1 10 gt all The show license command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 5 show license command parameters The following figure displays a sample output for the show license all command after installing the license file Figure 11 show license all command output 2526THshow lic all Number of licenses 1 version 0 md5_key 2eledfce fe9d8acf e31lfbe6a e3
139. Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Logging in If you set a password using the username or cli password command the next time you access the switch you are prompted for a username and password as shown in Figure 21 Login screen page 67 default usernames are RW and RO Figure 21 Login screen Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T HW A FW 1 0 6 12 SW y4 1 6 480 Username Hi Password seere J Enter Username Enter text press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt when complete Enter a valid user name and password and press Enter You are then directed to the CLI For the standard software image the default password for user RO is user and for user RW is secure For the secure software image the default password for RO is userpasswd and for RW is securepasswa Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 68 System configuration software features For information about the security features on the switch see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Autosave feature By default every 60 seconds the Ethernet Routing Switch checks whether a configuration change has occurred or if a log message is written to nonvolatile storage If one of these two events has occurred the system automatically saves i
140. Setting table 155 stack numbering configuring 154 Stacked button 140 stacking 39 151 154 Stacking Configuration 39 stacking functionality 40 stacking functionality delivery 40 StackInsertionUnitNumber 260 Standalone configuration 40 standalone mode 85 standards 80 State field 277 statistics for a single object 137 for multiple objects 138 graphing 134 single port 138 types 134 statistics dialog box multiple objects 138 statistics dialog boxes 127 status 164 Status field 273 280 Stop button 133 subnet mask 177 178 summary options changing stack numbering 154 identifying unit numbers 155 viewing stack information 151 switch information 153 Support heading 147 support Nortel Networks 20 switch configuration files not saved parameters retrieving from a TFTP server 331 storing ona TFTP server 331 switch configuration options bootP settings 319 gateway settings 319 high speed flow control 327 IP settings 319 network manager contact 322 port autonegotiation speed 324 port communication speed 334 retrieving from a TFTP server 331 storing ona TFTP server 331 switch images downloading 328 system location 322 system name 322 switch images downloading 328 switch information viewing 153 Switch Information page 153 switch port autonegotiation speed configuring 324 switch unit shortcut menu 131 switch selecting 129 switches supported 17 Synclnterval field 277 sysContact field 260 312 sysDescr field 260 sysLocation fi
141. Switch 2500 Series Click on this button to upload the ASCII configuration Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server You can store switch configuration parameters on a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server You can retrieve the configuration parameters and use the switch retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement To store a switch configuration you must set up the file on your TFTP server and set the filename read write permission to enabled To download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series configuration file a properly configured TFTP server must be present in your network and the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address To learn how to configure the switch IP address see Configuring BootP IP and gat eway settings page 319 To store or retrieve a switch configuration file use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 332 Configuring the switch using web based management Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Configuration File The Configuration File page appears Figure 124 Configuration File Configuration gt Configuration File Configuration File Setting Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address 192 167 120 100 XX
142. Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Diagnosing and correcting problems 339 Table 153 Corrective actions Symptom All LEDs are off The Activity LED for a connected port is off or does not blink and you Probable cause The switch is not receiving AC power The fans are not operating or the airflow is blocked causing the unit to overheat The switch is experiencing a port connection problem Corrective action Verify that the AC power cord is fastened securely at both ends and that power is available at the AC power outlet Verify that there is sufficient space for adequate airflow on both sides of the switch ATTENTION Operating temperature for the switch must not exceed 40 C 104 F Do not place the switch in areas where it can be exposed to direct sunlight or near warm air exhausts or heaters See Port connection problems page 339 have reason to believe ic i The switch s link that traffic is present e switch s lin partner is not autonegotiating properly Port connection problems You can usually trace port connection problems to either a poor cable connection or an improper connection of the port cables at either end of the link To remedy these types of problems make sure that the cable connections are secure and that the cables connect to the correct ports a
143. Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 default sntp command page 212 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 default speed commana page 238 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 default tftp server command page 199 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 357 Command default vlan igmp lt 1 4094 gt Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration IP Multicast NN47215 503 default vian mgmt disable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 disable commana page 92 download address lt ip gt image lt image name gt image if newer lt image name gt diag lt filename gt no reset download commana page 230 duplex
144. Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 no sntp enable command page 209 no sntp server command page 210 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 no tftp server command page 199 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ping command page 183 ping command page 183 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2
145. Switch 2500 Series stacking 39 Stacking capabilities 39 Stacking functionality delivery 40 Stack enabled switches 40 Standalone configuration with license files 40 Stack configuration 45 Configuring the operational mode on rear ports using the CLI 46 rear ports mode command 46 show rear ports mode command 46 Configuring the operational mode of rear ports using the Device Manager 47 Rear ports and stacking 47 Initial stack installation 49 Stack MAC address 49 FLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 6 Contents Stack configurations 49 Temporary base unit 51 Redundant cascade stacking 52 Removing a stack unit 53 Adding Replacing a stack unit 53 Auto Unit Replacement 54 AUR function 55 Configuring AUR using the CLI 61 Configuring AUR using Device Manager 63 System configuration software features 65 Switch management features 65 Configuration and switch management 65 Console port settings 66 Switch banner 66 User name and password 66 Logging in 67 Autosave feature 68 Using SNTP 68 Using DNS to ping and Telnet 69 BootP automatic IP configuration MAC address 70 Choosing a BootP request mode 70 Flash memory storage 72 Configuration File Download Upload 73 Requirements 73 Binary configuration file 73 ASCII configuration file 74 Autotopology 74 Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802 1
146. System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 152 Using the Web based management interface Figure 49 Stack Information page NORTEL Summary gt Stack Information Fmt Roar any Foti 25807 8 rch Enshi Acces IRIN mary mmi DEDEH CEE We UL 1P Address WZA Monutacturing Lare Code Y252026 Smiul g TENNTA ANF CELEJ Ponziiption theme So tirg Barzh 221 AU IW IZULaze X puz 2 WIW SWS camo gonz ples z W2taze patz piot Laces UIU Nema D5 Hoa 5 Horw theme Soshirg Sanch 20251 z IWIUaze X puz 2 WIW IUWI emo ponz pls Z WWisare patz ises Lazbes UU Neo Stack Information screen fields page 152 describes the fields on the Stack Information and Stack Inventory sections of the Stack Information screen Stack Information screen fields Section Fields Description Stack Inform System Description The name created in the configuration process to identify ation the stack Software Version The version of the running software MAC Address The MAC address of the stack IP Address The IP address of the stack Manufacturing Date The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format Code YYYYMMDD Serial Number The serial number of the base unit Operational State The current operational state of the device The operational states are Other Not Available Removed Disabled Normal Reset in Progress Testing Warning Non Fatal Erro
147. TEL Setting the Device Manager properties The Device Manager communicates with the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The software is shipped with default values set for important communication parameters such as the polling interval timeout and retry count You can set the parameters before you open a device to manage To set the Device Manager properties use the following procedure Step Action 1 Choose Device gt Properties gt Current The Default Properties dialog box appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Setting the Device Manager properties 121 Figure 31 Default Properties dialog box Device Manager 192 167 120 29 Properties Polling Retry Count 1 1 5 Status Interval 20 secs Timeout 5 3 30 secs Hotswap Detect every fi intervals I Trace IV Enable JX Listen For Traps Web Management Max Traps in Log 500 1 10000 Http Port 80 Application Control W Listen for Syslogs Confirm row deletion E Default Read Community public i Default Write Community private Application Launch from JDM g g E E c C e E Parameters are passed while calling the applications Use lt ip gt as place holder to represent the device address Close Help 2 Type information and select check boxe
148. TTL field of the TTL TLV indicates to the receiving LLDP agent how long the LLDPDU information from the MSAP identifier remains valid All LLDPDU information is automatically discarded by the receiving LLDP agent if the sender fails to update it in a timely manner A zero value in TTL field of Time To Live TLV tells the receiving LLDP agent to discard the information associated with the LLDPDU MSAP identifier In addition to the four mandatory TLVs Release 4 1 software supports the basic management TLV set You can specify which of these optional TLVs to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs for each port The optional management TLVs are as follows e Port Description TLV System Name TLV e System Description TLV e System Capabilities TLV indicates both the system supported capabilities and enabled capabilities such as end station bridge or router e Management Address TLV Transmitting LLDPDUs_ When a transmit cycle is initiated the LLDP manager extracts the managed objects from the LLDP local system MIB and formats this information into TLVs The TLVs are then inserted into the LLDPDU LLDPDUs are regularly transmitted at a user configurable transmit interval tx delay or when any of the variables contained in the LLPDU are modified on the local system such as system name or management address Tx delay is the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions TLV system MIBs_ The LLDP local system MIB stores the
149. The following table describes the fields on the Software Download page Table 146 Software Download page fields Fields Range Description Current Running Version The version of the current running software Local Store Version The local version of the software in the flash memory Software Image Filename 1 30 Type the software image file name Diagnostics Filename 1 30 Type the diagnostics file name TFTP Server IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Type the IP address of your TFTP load host Download Option No Choose the software download option Software Image Diagnostics Software Image If Newer Download without reset 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The software download process automatically completes without user intervention The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion the process can take up to ten minutes depending on network conditions Unless you choose the Download without reset option the switch automatically resets after the download process is complete The new software image then initiates a self test During the download process the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is not operational You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications End The following table describes the LED indication
150. Unit 1 i KEN Unit 1 Port 1 read only Status Enabled for all ports LnkTrap On Autonegotiation Enabled for all ports Speed Duplex 100Mbs Half when Autonegotiation is Disabled Autonegotiation Enabled Speed Duplex 100Mbs Half when Autonegotiation is Disabled Flow Control Disabled 1 to 6 depending on configuration status Trunk 1 to Trunk 6 Monitor Unit Port Zero length string Unit Port X Zero length string Limit 0 pps Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 346 Appendix B Default settings Field Default setting Packet Type Both Snooping Disabled VLAN 1 Robust Value 2 Set Router Ports Version 1 i Display Messages From Volatile Display configuration complete No TELNET WEB Switch Password Type None TELNET Password Type None Console Read Only Switch Password user standard software image Console Read Write Switch Password secure standard software image Console Read Only Switch Password userpasswd secure software image Console Read Write Switch Password securepasswd secure software image Secondary RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 Bridge Priority 8000 in Hex Bridge Hello Time 2 seconds Bridge Max Age Time 20 seconds Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview Sys
151. X T h IP Switch IP ype a new switc address in the appropriate format Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 322 Configuring the switch using web based management Section Wem Range pescnpion Address ATTENTION When the IP address is entered in the In Band IP Address field and the In Band Subnet Mask field value is not present the software provides an in use default value for the In Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the class of the IP address entered in the In Band IP Address field In Band XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a new subnet mask in the Subnet Mast appropriate format Network routers use the subnet mask to determine the network or subnet address portion of a host s IP address The bits in the IP address that contain the network address including the subnet are set to 1 in the address mask and the bits that contain the host identifier are set to 0 Gateway Default XXX XXX XXX XXX Type an IP address for the default Setting Gateway gateway in the appropriate format 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit End Modifying system settings You can create or modify the system name system location and network manager contact information Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview
152. X X XX Specifies the TFTP server from which to load the file Enter the IP gt address in dotted decimal notation ATTENTION If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP the system uses the configured address ATTENTION When you specify the file name or address these parameters change at the next reboot even if you do not specify load on boot show config network command The show config network command displays information regarding the automatic loading of the configuration file including the current status of this feature the file name the TFTP server address and the status of the previous automatic configuration command The syntax for the show config network command is show config network The show config network command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show config network command has no parameters or values Figure 61 show config network command output page 191 shows the output for the show config network command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuration Management 191 Figure 61 show config network command output 2556T PWRH show conf ig network Auto Load Configuration On Boot Disabled Configuration Filename TFTP Server IP Address 192 167 120 13 Last Auto Configuration Status Passed Last Manual Configuratio
153. X XKXK KIX Copy Configuration Image to Target No x Retrieve Configuration Image from Target No Autosave Configuration Autosave Enabled ED The following table describes the Configuration File Setting items on the Configuration File page Table 149 Configuration File Setting items Description Configuration Image 1 32 Type the configuration file name Filename TFTP Server IP XXX XXX XXX XXX Type the IP address of the TFTP load host Address Retrieve Configuration Choose whether or not to retrieve the Image from Target configuration image from a server If you choose Yes the download process begins immediately and when completed causes the switch to reset with the new configuration parameters 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list LLL Nortel ble Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling and disabling autosave 333 3 Click Submit End Requirements for storing and retrieving configuration parameters on a TFTP server The following requirements apply when storing and retrieving configuration parameters on a TFTP server e The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches e Aconfiguration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure oth
154. a maximum of 64 characters including the file extension Numerals are allowed in the LicenseFileName but special characters like and so on are not allowed 5 In the LicenseFileAction field select dnidLicense 6 Click Apply 7 Click Refresh The LicenseFileStatus field displays the file copy progress After the file copy completes a warning message appears prompting you to reboot the switch and activate the license 8 To reboot the switch choose Edit gt Chassis 9 Under the System tab select the reboot option and click Apply End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 44 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Downloading the license files using the Web based management interface You can download the license files to the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch To download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series license files a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server must be present in your network and the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address To download a license file use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt License Download The License Download page appears Figure 12 License Download page NORTEL Configuration gt License Download License Download Setting
155. a straight through DB 9 to DB 9 standard serial port cable You must use a VT100 ANSI compatible terminal for cursor control and to activate cursor and functions keys to use the Console port The default settings of the Console port are e 9600 baud with eight data bits e one stop bit no parity as the communications format e flow control set to disabled Gigabit Interface Converter Small Form Factor Pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters are hot swappable input and output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with fiber optic networks SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers are hot swappable input output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet ports over various media types The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series supports the following SFPs e 1000Base SX SFP GBIC mini GBIC connector type LC e 1000Base SX SFP GBIC mini GBIC connector type MT RJ e 1000Base LX SFP GBIC mini GBIC connector type LC e CWDM SFPs For more information about the SFP GBICs see Installing Gigabit Interface Converters SFPs and CWDM SFP Gigabit Interface Converters 312865 Port connectors The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series uses 10BASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 8 pin modular port connectors The Ethernet Routing Switch 2
156. ab 74 Ethernet port management features 77 Autosensing and autonegotiation 77 Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements 77 High speed flow control 78 Rate Limiting Configuration 79 Other features 79 RFCs 79 Standards 80 CLI Basics 81 CLI command modes 82 Port numbering 85 Port numbering in Standalone Mode 85 Accessing CLI 86 Setting the system username and password 87 Getting help 87 LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Contents 7 Basic navigation 87 General navigation commands 88 Keystroke navigation 88 help command 89 no command 90 default command 90 logout command 90 enable command 91 configure command 91 interface command 91 disable command 92 end command 92 exit command 92 reload command 93 shutdown command 94 Managing basic system information 96 show sys info command 96 show tech command 97 Managing MAC address forwarding database table 98 show mac address table command 98 mac address table aging time command 99 default mac address table aging time command 99 Getting Started with Device Manager 101 Installing Device Manager 101 JDM installation precautions 102 Installing the Device Manager software 102 Installing JDM on Windows 102 Windows minimum requirements 103 Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows 103 Installing JDM on Windows from the CD 104 Installing JD
157. able command enables the autosave feature The syntax for the autosave enable command is autosave enable The autosave enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The autosave enable command has no parameters or variables no autosave enable command The no autosave enable command disables the autosave feature The syntax for the no autosave enable command is no autosave enable The no autosave enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no autosave enable command has no parameters or variables default autosave enable command The default autosave enable command defaults the autosave feature to the default value of enabled The syntax for the default autosave enable command is default autosave enable The default autosave enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default autosave enable command has no parameters or variables Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 208 System configuration using the CLI Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP feature synchronizes the Universal Coordinated Time UTC to an accuracy within 1 second This feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 MIB is the sSagent With this feature the system can obtain t
158. ables for the show ip address command Table 50 show ip address command parameters and variables Parameters and D scribtion variables p Displays the current IP address Figure 57 show ip address command output page 182 displays a sample output of the show ip address command Figure 57 show ip address command output 255 T PWRH show ip address Conf igured In Use Last BootP Stack IP Address 192 168 1 2 8 0 0 8 Switch IP Address 192 167 120 29 192 167 120 2 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 8 0 0 8 2556T PWURE Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring the switch IP address subnet mask and default gateway 183 Pinging To ensure that the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series has connectivity to the network ping a device you know is connected to this network ping command The ping command tests the network connection to another network device The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packet from the switch to the target device The local IP address must be set before issuing the ping command See Assigning and clearing IP addresses page 178 for information on setting IP addresses The syntax for the ping command is ping lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt datasize lt 64 4096 gt count lt 1 9999 gt continuous timeout t
159. ack do the following Step Action 1 Power down all switches 2 Set the Unit Select switch at the rear of the non base units to the off position 3 Plug all stack cables in to the rear RJ 45 cascade ports and ensure the cables are connected from Cascade Down on the first unit to Cascade Up on the second unit and so on The last unit in the stack must be connected back to the first unit for full stack resiliency Ensure all the cascade cables are properly connected 4 Power up all the switches in the stack starting with the Base unit ATTENTION In a mixed stack of 2526T 2526T PWR 2550T and 2550T PWR any switch can act as the Base unit End ATTENTION The rear ports must be operating Stacking Mode before adding a switch into a stack Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 46 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Configuring the operational mode on rear ports using the CLI You can use the following commands to configure the operational mode of rear ports into Stacking or Standalone Mode e rear ports mode command page 46 e show rear ports mode command page 46 rear ports mode command The rear ports mode command configures the operational mode of the rear port The syntax for the rear ports mode is rear ports mode unit lt 1 8 gt standalon
160. against any misconfigurations when you perform dynamic configuration changes on a remote switch The following example describes how you can use the reload command to prevent connectivity loss to a remote switch Step Action 1 Enter the CLI command reload force 30 This instructs the switch to reboot in 30 minutes loading the configuration from NVRAM During this 30 minute period autosave of the configuration to NVRAM is disabled 2 Execute dynamic switch configuration commands which take effect immediately These configurations are not saved to NVRAM 3 If the configurations cause no problems and switch connectivity is maintained you can perform the following 4 Save the current running configuration using the copy config nvram write memory Of save config command 5 Since the new configuration is working properly cancel the reload using the reload cancel command End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 94 CLI Basics If you make an error when performing configurations in Step 2 that results in the loss of switch connectivity for example an error in the IP address mask MLT configuration or VLAN trunking the reload command provides you with a safeguard when the reload timer expires the switch reboots to the last saved configuration and connectivity is re established T
161. ager Use the Device Manager to configure the operational mode of the rear ports into Standalone or Stacking Mode in the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series For more information on configuring the operational mode of rear ports see Rear Ports Mode tab page 252 Rear ports and stacking The rear panel view of a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switch consists of two RJ 45 1000BaseT ports and a Unit Select switch In Stacking Mode the two rear ports become the Cascade Down and Cascade Up ports for connecting switch units in a stack configuration The rear panel components are illustrated in the following diagram Figure 14 Rear panel components MODE Standalone gt Port 27 Port 28 Stacking gt Cascade Down Cascade Up Unit Select 1 Unit Select switch 2 Cascade Down port 3 Cascade Up port Unit Select switch The Unit Select switch is used to designate a switch in the stack as the base unit Sliding the switch to the right designates that switch as the base unit Only one switch in a stack has the Unit Select switch in the base unit position All other switches in the stack must have the Unit Select switch in the left position The base unit designation of a switch is also displayed on the front panel LED display For more information see Table 2 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series LED descriptions page 28 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 5
162. ager sl Install Complete A Introdu gt ies soem R Choose Install Sets Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder S Pre installation Summary Installing A Install Complete Congratulations Java Device Manager has been successfully installed to C Program Files NortehJDM Press Done to quit the installer 14 Click Done to exit the installation JDM is now installed on your machine End Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux ATTENTION JDM installation procedures are standardized across all platforms In addition the required Java Runtime Environment JRE version 1 5 is part of the JDM installation package and does not require a separate installation The bundled JRE is used with this JDM only and does not affect other Java applications on the same system UNIX and Linux systems are case sensitive Use lower case to specify file names and check to ensure that directories are entered correctly This section includes the following topics e Minimum requirements page 111 e Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD page 111 e Installing JDM on Linux from the CD page 111 Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web page 112 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 111 Minimum requirements JDM su
163. ailable Removed Disabled Normal Reset in Progress Testing Warning Non Fatal Errors Fatal Error and Not Configured Mac Address The mac address of the switch IP Address The IP address of the switch Fans Status The fan status of the switch Changing stack numbering If the system is in a stack existing stack numbering information can be viewed and renumbered ATTENTION The unit number does not affect the base unit designation To view or renumber devices within the stack framework Step Action 1 Open the Stack Numbering screen by selecting Summary gt Stack Numbering from the menu This screen is illustrated in Stack Numbering page Figure 51 Stack Numbering page NORTEL Summary gt Stack Numbering Simah Muanuloae in Casvaweot Linit Haan Stack Numbering screen fields page 155 describes the fields on the Stack Numbering screen Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Identifying unit numbers 155 Stack Numbering screen fields Field Item Range Description Stack Numb Current Unit X Unit number previously assigned to the ering Setting Number policy switch The entries in this column are displayed in order of their current physical cabling with respect to the base unit and can show non consecutive unit numbering if one or more units were previously
164. ailable the value is a zero length string SerNum The serial number of the component or subcomponent If not available the value is a zero length string BaseNumPorts The number of base ports of the component or subcomponent TotalNumPorts The number of ports of the component or subcomponent IpAddress The IP address of the component or subcomponent End Agent tab The Agent tab provides read only information about the addresses that the agent software uses to identify the switch To open the Agent tab use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 266 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit gt Chassis The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed 3 Click the Agent tab The Agent tab appears Edit Chassis dialog box Agent tab 7 92 467 120 20 Chasis System Base Unt Info Agert SNMP Trap Receivers Powersupply Fan Banner Custom Banewe ADAC ADAC MAC Ranges Stack Monitor Nentiiootipaddr NexttBocthiet Mask LoadServerddd _ImagePishlane _ vaid iag BoctRouter addr 192 167 120 28 295 255 255 0 192 167 352 quokha 410s amq vabd 10 000 00 19 60 4 28 00 potvest Hy IES 4a E E cove Het End
165. an obtain the time from any RFC 2030 compliant NTP SNTP server The system retries connecting with the NTP server a maximum of 3 times with 5 minutes between each retry If the connection fails after the 3 attempts the system waits for the next synchronization time the default is 24 hours and begins the process again Configuring SNTP The SNTP_Clock dialog box contains the parameters for configuring Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP To open the SNTP_clock dialog box use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Main Menu choose Edit gt SNTP Clock The SNTP_Clock dialog box appears Select the Simple Network Time Protocol tab End Figure 97 SNTP_Clock dialog box ei x Simple Network Time Protocol Time Zone Daylight Saving Time PrimaryServerAddress 0 0 0 0 SecondaryServerAddress 0 0 0 0 State disabled enabled unicast SyncInterval 24 0 168 hours O boot time only ManualSyncRequest C requestSync LastSyncTime notSet LastSyncSource 0 0 0 0 NextSyncTime notSet PrimaryServerSyncFailures 0 SecondaryServerSyncFailures 0 CurrentTime notSet Refresh cose Hetp When clear out both Primary Secondary Server Address 0 0 0 0 Please change State to disabled state first Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Working w
166. and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 spanning tree mstp msti lt 1 7 gt port lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series cost lt 1 200000000 gt learning disable Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and enable priority 00 10 E FO MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 spanning tree mstp msti lt 1 7 gt priority 0000 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 1000 E FO00 add vlan lt vid gt remove vlan Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and lt vid gt enable MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 spanning tree mstp port lt portlist gt cost lt 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 200000000 gt edge port false true hello time Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and lt 1 10 gt learning disable enable p2p auto MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 force false force true priority 00 10 FO protocol migration false true spanning tree mstp region config id sell Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt 0 255 gt region name lt 1 32 Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and chars gt region version lt 0 65535 gt MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 spanning tree port lt portlist gt learning Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series disable normal fast cost lt 1 65535 gt priority Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and lt 0 255 gt MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 spanning tree rstp forward time lt 4 30 gt Nortel E
167. and 241 no ip address command 179 no ip bootp server command 197 no ip default gateway 180 no ip domain name command 188 no ip name server command 187 no ip netmask command 179 no Ildp config notification command 220 no Ildp status command 223 no Ildp tx tlv command 221 no name command 236 no poe shutdown command 161 no poe trap command 160 no rate limit command 244 no shutdown command 234 no sntp enable command 209 209 no sntp server command 210 no tftp server command 199 NoSuchObject error message 303 308 NotificationControlEnable field 174 numbering stacks 154 unit 155 155 O object types 128 objects editing 134 selecting 128 online Help 127 143 Open Device button 123 128 Open Device dialog box 124 operating port color 131 Operational State field 152 OperDuplex field 307 OperSpeed field 307 310 310 OperState field 262 265 OperStatus field 173 306 309 P passwords 87 Paste button 133 PD Detect Type field 169 PhysAddress field 306 309 ping command 183 185 Pluggable port 152 PoE available power 173 DC power source 158 disabling 176 disabling port power 161 enabling 176 enabling or disabling 170 enabling port power 161 enabling power 160 error codes 158 165 error messages 176 management 167 port configuration 170 port power limit 163 port priority 160 162 170 176 port settings 175 power being used 173 power configurations 168 power detection 158 power limit 160 power pairs 158 168 powe
168. and you want to know what arguments match the input e g show pr gt Keystroke navigation Ctr1 A Start of line Ctr11 B Back 1 character Ctrl C Abort command and exit to Privileged EXEC mode Ctr1 D Delete the character indicated by the cursor Ctr11 E End of line Ctr11 F Forward 1 character Ctr1 H amp Backspace Delete character left of cursor Ctr1 I amp Tab Command parameter completion Ctr1 K Delete all characters to right of cursor CCtr1 N or Down arrow Next history command More q Quit space return Cont inue gt no command The no command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command and it negates the action performed by that command The effect of the no command is to remove or to clear the configuration controlled by the specified command Various no commands are in the config and config if command modes See Appendix Command List page 353 for an alphabetical listing of all no commands ATTENTION Not all configuration commands support the no prefix command default command The default command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command and it restores the configuration parameters to default values The default values are specified by each command See Appendix A for an alphabetical listing of all default commands ATTENTION Not all commands support the default prefix command logout command The Logout command logs you out of the CLI
169. ann nnn HEH TEI EE nnn nnn HARE HH Enter Ctrl to begin SOA OIE SEDE SE DE DE LLL PEDE LHD LA IA ISIS SISA SI LAI I ASI SILI DE ACSI ASSIS SSSI AAA A Ethernet Routing Switch 25 S T_PWR laiade Nortel sree x Copyright lt c 1996 2086 All Rights Reserved mnre pan SSH por x HUBA PW 1 6 6 5 SW 04 6 6 6 beieied User name and password You can use the CLI to set user names as well as passwords for system access through the CLI Telnet and web based management The syntax for the username command is username lt username gt lt password gt ro rw Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Switch management features 67 You can also set the CLI password using the cli password command or the Password Setting web based management page When you log on to the switch you are prompted to enter a valid user name Therefore ensure you are aware of the valid usernames default RW and RO before you change passwords For the standard software image the default password for user RO is user and for user RW is secure For the secure software image the default password for RO is userpasswd and for RW is securepasswa For more information about this and other advanced security features supported on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500
170. at you want to copy the configuration file onto the TFTP server Enter the name you want the configuration file to have on the TFTP server Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 200 System configuration using the CLI copy tftp config command The copy tftp config command retrieves the system configuration file from the TFTP server and uses the retrieved information as the current configuration on the system The syntax for the copy tftp config command is copy tftp config address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt filename lt WORD gt The copy tftp config command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 64 copy tftp config command parameters and variables page 200 describes the parameters and variables for the copy tftp config command Table 64 copy tftp config command parameters and variables Parameters and oe Description variables address lt XXX XXX X Specifies the TFTP server IP address enter in XX XXX gt dotted decimal notation filename lt WORD gt Enter the name of the configuration file you want to copy from the TFTP server Customizing the opening banner You can customize the banner that appears when you connect to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series You can customize the text that reads NORTEL However you cannot customize the second line that reads
171. ation page appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Installing JDM on Windows 105 4 Download the JDM software for Windows to a desired directory on your system The software download is a self extracting exe file Once the file transfer is complete continue with step 5 5 Close all programs 6 Navigate to the directory on your system where you downloaded the JDM Software 7 Double click the jdm_xxxx exe file ATTENTION In the file name xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on Windows page 105 End Executing the JDM installation software on Windows An install screen appears followed by a Nortel dialog box When the InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears you are ready to install the JDM Figure 28 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box Peles Introduction a introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of Java Device ail SIT Manager Fac itis strongly recommended that you quit all programs before Bo continuing with this installation Boh 8P Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen Ifyou want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button es os You may cance this installation at any time by clicking the Cance
172. atus command parameters and variables page 166 describes the parameters and variables for the show poe port status command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 166 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR Table 40 show poe port status command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Enter the ports for which you want to display the status ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system displays all ports Figure 54 show poe port status command output page 166 displays sample output from the show poe port status command Figure 54 show poe port status command output 255 T PWR show poe port status Admin Current Limit Port Status Status Classification lt Watts Priority Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 2 Enable Detecting 8 16 Low B Enable Detecting 5 16 Low g Enable Detecting 4 16 Low Enable Detecting 8 16 Low 6 Enable Delivering Power 3 16 Low Enable Detecting 5 16 Low g Enable Detecting 5 16 Low Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 10 Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 14 Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 12 Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 13 Enable Detecting 6 16 Low 4 Enable Detecting 6 16 Low 5 Enable Detecting 6 16 Low 6 Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 7 Enable Detecting 5 16 Low 8 Enab
173. ault flowcontrol command is default flowcontrol port lt portlist gt The default flowcontrol command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 102 default flowconrtol command parameters and variables page 242 describes the parameters and variables for the default flowcontrol command Table 102 default flowconrtol command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to default to auto flow control ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command Enabling rate limiting You can limit the percentage of multicast traffic or broadcast traffic or both using the CLI Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling rate limiting 243 This section contains information about the following e show rate limit command page 243 e rate limit command page 243 e no rate limit command page 244 default rate limit commana page 244 show rate limit command The show rate limit command displays the rate limiting settings and statistics The syntax for the show rate limit command is show rate limit The show rate limit command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show rate limit command has no parameters or va
174. b s ports on the rear panel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550 has 48 10 100 ports on the front as well as two combo ports which includes two GBIC or two copper ports at 10 100 1000Mbps The switch also provides two 1000 Mb s ports on the rear panel The CLI uses the variable lt portlist gt when a command specifies one or more ports for the command Port numbering in Standalone Mode In a Standalone Mode the port number variable is an integer between 1 and 52 for Ethernet Routing Switch 2550 and 1 to 28 for Ethernet Routing Switch 2526 You can use the lt portlist gt variable in the following formats A single port number a integer between 1 and 52 Example 7 means port 7 A range of port numbers a pair of port numbers between 1 and 52 separated by a dash Example 1 3 means ports 1 2 and 3 Example 5 24 means all ports from port 5 through port 24 A list of port numbers and or port ranges separated by commas Example 1 3 7 means ports 1 3 and 7 Example 1 3 9 11 means ports 1 2 3 9 10 and 11 Example 1 3 5 9 11 15 means ports 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 and 15 none means no ports all means all the ports on the standalone Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series including any GBIC ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 86 CLI Basics You can also
175. bes the parameters and variables for the default Ildp status command Table 86 default Ildp status command parameters and variables Parameters and h Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the ports affected by the command show lidp command The show 11dp command displays configuration data for LLDP The syntax for the show Ildp command is show lldp local sys data mgmt sys data pdu tlv size stats The show 11dp command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 87 show Ildp command parameters and variables page 224 describes the parameters and variables for the show Ildp command Table 87 show Ildp command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables local sys data Displays local LLDP system data mgmt sys data Displays LLDP management data pdu tlv size Displays 802 1ab tlv in pdu stats Displays LLDP statistics Figure 78 show lldp local sys data command output page 225 displays the output from the show Ildp local sys data command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using the CLI 225 Figure 78 show Ildp local sys data command output ChassisId MAC address 60 19 69 af c8 68 SysName SysCap B B lt Supported Enabled gt SysDescr Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T HW 6A FW 1 0 0 12 SW v4 1 0
176. bles for the poe poe priority command Table 38 poe poe priority command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Enter the port numbers on which you want to disable power Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI 163 Parameters and Variables Description ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port entered with the interface FastEthernet command low high Sets the port priority as critical low high critical ATTENTION The default setting is low When two ports have the same priority and one must be shut down the port with the higher port number is shut down first poe poe limit command The poe poe limit command sets the maximum power allowed to a port The syntax for the poe poe limit command is poe poe limit port lt portlist gt lt 3 16 gt The poe poe limit command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 39 poe poe limit command parameters and variables page 164 describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe limit command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nort
177. c If AdminStatus is down then OperStatus should be down It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed LastChange The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem the value is zero LinkTrap Specifies whether linkUp linkDown traps should be generated for this interface AutoNegotiate Indicates whether this port is enabled for autonegotiation or not AdminDuplex The current administrative duplex mode of the port half or full Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing and editing multiple port configurations 307 Field Description OperDuplex The current mode of the port half duplex or full duplex AdminSpeed Set the port s speed OperSpeed The current operating speed of the port AutoNegotiationCapability Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can support on a port and that may be advertised by the port using auto negotiation AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during Advertisments link negotiation Mitld The MultiLink Tr
178. cade Down LED for Unit 2 and the Cascade Up LED for Unit 4 turn amber to indicate an error has been detected e The remaining stack units continue to be connected Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stack configuration 53 Redundant cascade stacking Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 1 Base Unit 2 Last Unit 3 Stack cable 4 Stack cable used for return Removing a stack unit If a unit is removed from the stack the following switch configuration settings revert to those configured before the unit became a member of the stack e IP address e Console Web Telnet and SNMP passwords e SNMP community strings Adding Replacing a stack unit To replace a failed stack unit or insert a new unit into a stack follow this procedure Step Action 1 Upload a copy of the stack configuration file to a TFTP server Since unit failure is not a predictable situation it is suggested that the stack configuration file is backed up regularly to a TFTP server 2 Obtain the new ERS 2500 switch Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 54 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Ensure that the new switch is set to factory default
179. ch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 350 Appendix B Default settings Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 351 Appendix C Sample BootP configuration file This appendix provides a sample BootP configuration file The BootP server searches for this file called bootptab or BOOTPTAB TXT depending on your operating system which contains the site specific information including IP addresses needed to perform the software download and configuration You can modify this sample BootP configuration file or create one of your own A sample BootP configuration file follows The following is a sample of a BootP configuration file that was extracted from a Nortel EZ LAN network management application Note that other BootP daemons can use a configuration file with a different format Before using your switch BootP facility you must customize your BootP configuration file with the appropriate data Blank lines and lines beginning with are ignored Legend first field hostname ht hardware type ha host hardware address tc template host points to similar host entry ip host IP address hd bootfile home directory bf bootfile EZ dt device type EZ fv fi
180. ck the Daylight Saving Time tab The Daylight Saving Time tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Displaying topology information using Device Manager 279 a xj Simple Network Time Protocol Time Zone Daylight Saving Time Offset 0 840 840 minutes Start ear 1990 1990 2099 StartMonth Jan x StartDay 1 1 31 StartHour 1Zam se StartMinutes 0 0 59 EndYear 1990 1990 2099 EndMonth Jan v EndDay EndHour EndMinutes 0 0 59 Enabled Refresh Close Help Offset in minutes is added to the current time when daylight saving time begins and subtracted when it ends Daylight saving time summer time must be disabled when configure daylight saving time attributes Setup proper daylight saving time attributes first before enable the daylight saving time 3 Type the number of minutes to shift the clock in the Offset box 4 Select the StartYear StartMonth StartDate StartHour and type the StartMinutes to define when to switch the clock to daylight saving time 5 Select the EndYear EndMonth EndDate EndHour and type the EndMinutes if applicable to define when to switch the clock back to normal time If you want to keep the same daylight saving time changeover dates you can set the EndYear to a year in the future 6 C
181. command is poe poe shutdown port lt portlist gt The poe poe shutdown command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 162 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR Table 37 poe poe shutdown command parameters and variables page 162 describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe shutdown command Table 37 poe poe shutdown command parameters and variables Parameters and h Description variables P port lt portlist gt Enter the port numbers on which you want to disable power The default value is enabled ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port entered with the interface FastEthernet command poe poe priority command The poe poe priority command lets you set the power priority for each port to low high or critical The system uses the port power priority settings to distribute power to the ports depending on the available power budget The syntax for the poe poe priority command is poe poe priority port lt portlist gt low high critical The poe poe priority command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 38 poe poe priority command parameters and variables page 162 describes the parameters and varia
182. configuration file 197 Copy File tab 272 copy running config tftp command 192 copy tftp config command 200 critical 162 Cumulative statistics 134 current 167 CurrentDefaultGateway field 261 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 Index 381 CurrentlmageVersion field 261 CurrentMgmtProtocol field 260 CurrentTime field 277 CurState field 281 Custom Banner tab 271 customer support 20 D data exporting 138 DB 9 console comm port connector 341 DC power 169 DC power source 158 DC Power Source field 169 DC Power Status 169 default access community strings for Device Manager 123 default auto negotiation advertisements command 247 default autosave enable command 207 default autotopology command 216 default command 88 90 default duplex command 239 default flowcontrol command 242 default ip address command 179 default ip default gateway 181 default ip domain name command 188 default ip netmask command 179 default ipbootp server command 197 default Ildp command 219 default Ildp port config notification command 220 default Ildp status command 223 default Ildp tx tlv command 222 default mac address table aging time command 99 default name command 236 default rate limit command 244 Default read community 122 default settings default sntp command 212 default spe
183. custom banner To open the Banner tab use the following procedure Step 1 2 Action Select the chassis From the main menu choose Edit gt Chassis The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed Click the Banner tab The Banner tab appears Edit Chassis dialog box Banner tab 192 167 120 28 Chassis System Base Unt Info Agent SNMP Trap Receivers Powersupply Fan Banner Custom Banner ADAC ADAC MAC Ranges Stack Monitor BarerCerteol Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 270 Configuring the switch using Device Manager End To set the default banner use the following procedure Step Action 1 In the Banner tab click on the static radio button and then click Apply This resets the banner in Telnet to the default banner To check that the default banner is set in Telnet 2 In the main menu click on Device gt Telnet The Telnet window appears with the default banner displayed End Figure 93 Telnet window with default banner aan St SH BEREREHEEH BERNER HEY Rete HHH KEELI HHH HNNNNNHRRRHNH HARKEN HNNHEHHRHNHHN HuRRRRHHRNN HHH nunn nnn unn nun nnn nnn nun nun nun ed Hat HH nnn nun nug nun aut nun htt tit BRR HRRREHHHEHH n t ELEELE EEI nut tat MNN HEE nae HUN HNNNNNEHEHEI nun nunnnRNHHNH nun HRR HHH e nnn nut
184. d no reset Download the specified software without resetting the unit or stack poe module imag Specifies the name of the PoE image file e The software download process automatically completes without user intervention The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion the process can take up to 10 minutes depending on network conditions When the download process is complete the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self test The system returns a message after successfully downloading a new image Figure 86 download message page 231 shows a sample output of the download command Figure 86 download message Download Image Saving Image Finishing Upgrading Image During the download process the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is not operational You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 232 System configuration using the CLI Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 233 Ethernet port managemen
185. d arguments Enter only one of the choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both Related publications For more information about using the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 see the following publications Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Release NotesNortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Release Notes Software Release 4 0 NN47215 400 Documents important changes about the software and hardware that are not covered in other related publications Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol STP and MultiLink Trunk MLT features for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration Quality of Service NN47215 504 Describes how to configure and manage Quality of Service and IP Filtering features for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Describes how to configure and manage security for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Describes how to configure s
186. d in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 80 default Ildp config notification command parameters and variables page 220 describes the parameters and variables for the default Ildp config notification command Table 80 default Ildp config notification command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Specifies the ports affected by the command Description Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using the CLI 221 lidp tx tlv command The lldp tx tlv command specifies the optional TLVs to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs The syntax for the 1ldp tx tlv command is lldp tx tlv port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr port desc sys cap sys desc sys name The 1ldp tx tlv command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 81 Ildp tx tlv command parameters and variables page 221 describes the parameters and variables for the Ildp tx tlv command Table 81 IIdp tx tlv command parameters and variables Parameters and h Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the ports affected by the command local mgmt addr Local management address TLV port desc Port description TLV sys cap System capabilities TLV sys desc System description TLV sys name System name TLV no lidp tx tlv command The
187. d is show ip bootp default gateway address switch dns The show ip command is executed in the User Exec command mode If you do not enter any parameters this command displays all the IP related configuration information Table 49 show ip command parameters and variables page 181 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip command Table 49 show ip command parameters and variables rabies a Figure 56 show ip command output page 182 displays a sample output of the show ip command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 182 System configuration using the CLI Figure 56 show ip command output 255 T PWR gt show ip Bootp Mode BootP Or Default IP Conf igured In Use Last BootP Stack IP Address 192 168 1 2 Switch IP Address 192 167 120 29 192 167 120 292 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 167 120 1 192 167 120 1 255 T PWR gt T b555 booi ioii show ip address command The show ip address command displays the IP configurations switch address subnet mask and gateway address The syntax for the show ip address command is show ip address The show ip address command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 50 show ip address command parameters and variables page 182 describes the parameters and vari
188. d view remote table statistics Use the following procedure to open the Globals tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Figure 100 LLDP Globals tab 192 167 120 208 LLDP ance nr pn E EE E E E EEE e The following table describes the Globals tab fields Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 283 Table 128 LLDP Globals tab fields Field Description IidpMessage TxInterval The interval in seconds at which LLDP frames are transmitted on behalf of this LLDP agent lldpMessageTx The time to live value expressed as HoldMultiplier a multiple of the object The actual time to live value used in LLDP frames transmitted on behalf of this LLDP agent is expressed by the following formula TTL min 65535 IldopMessageT xInterval IIdpMessageT xHoldMultiplier For example if the value of IIdpMessageTxinterval is 30 and the value of IldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier is 4 the value 120 is encoded in the TTL field in the LLDP header IIdpReinitDelay The IldpReinitDelay indicates the delay in seconds from when the LLDP Port AdminStatus of a particular port is disabled until reinitialization begins lldpTxDelay The
189. ddress command parameters and variables Parameters and h Description variables p lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of the primary NTP server The default is 0 0 0 0 sntp server secondary address command The sntp server secondary address command specifies the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server The syntax for the sntp server secondary address command is sntp server secondary address lt A B C D gt The sntp server secondary address command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 70 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables page 210 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server secondary address command Table 70 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables Parameters and er h Description variables lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of the secondary NTP server The default is 0 0 0 0 no sntp server command The no sntp server command clears the NTP server IP addresses The syntax forthe no sntp server command is no sntp server lt primary secondary gt The no sntp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 71 no sntp server command parameters and variables page 211 describes the parameters and variables for the no sntp server command FLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 C
190. e following procedure to open the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab The Neighbor Mgmt Address tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 298 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 108 Neighbor Mgmt Address tab 192 168 249 46 LLDP xj Gobals Port TX Sats RX Stats Local System Local Port Local Management Neighbor N ighibor Mgmt Address Unknown TLY Organizational Defined Info TiseMark Locabarttham index AddrSubtype Adar AdaiSubtype Adceirtd AdoiD ta Oros The following table describes the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab fields Table 135 Neighbor Mgmt Address tab fields Field Description TimeMark The TimeFilter for this entry LocalPortNum Identifies the local port on which the remote system information is received Index An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular MSAP An agent is encouraged to assign monotonically increasing index values to new entries starting with one after each reboot AddrSubtype The type of encoding used in the associated Addr object Addr The managemen
191. e port number you specified in the interface command The shutdown line lt portlist gt command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Figure 87 shutdown port command output page 234 displays sample output from the shutdown line lt portlist gt command ATTENTION You can disable switch ports that are trunk members if you choose to disable them one by one If you choose to disable all ports of the unit or stack the changes can have effect on the ports belonging to MLTs Figure 87 shutdown port command output 2526T lt confiq if gt shutdown port 6 2526T Cconf ig if gt no shutdown command The no shutdown command enables the port The syntax for the no shutdown command is no shutdown line lt portlist gt The no shutdown command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 92 no shutdown command parameters and variables page 235 describes the parameters and variables for the no shutdown command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Naming ports 235 Table 92 no shutdown command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p line lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to enable Enter the port numbers you want to disable ATTENTION If you omit this parameter th
192. e stacking The rear ports mode command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 7 rear ports mode commana page 46 describes the parameters and variables for the rear ports mode command Table 7 rear ports mode command Parameters and variables Description unit lt 1 8 gt Specifies the unit number You can use a maximum of eight units standalone stacking Specifies the operational mode of the selected unit show rear ports mode command The show rear ports mode displays the operational mode of the rear port The syntax for the show rear ports mode is show rear ports mode The show rear ports mode command is executed in Global Configuration command mode in the CLI There are no parameters and variables for show rear ports mode command Figure 13 show rear ports mode command output page 47 displays a sample output of the show rear ports mode command when the rear ports are set and running in Stacking Mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stack configuration 47 Figure 13 show rear ports mode command output 2926T show rear ports mode Current rear ports mode Stacking Mode Next rear ports mode Stacking Mode Next mode will be applied after reset 29261 _ Configuring the operational mode of rear ports using the Device Man
193. e system uses the port number you specified in the interface command Naming ports You can name a port using the CLI This section covers the following commands e name command page 235 e no name command page 236 e default name command page 236 name command The name command lets you name ports or to change the name The syntax for the name command is name port lt portlist gt lt LINE gt The name command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 93 name command parameters and variables page 235 describes the parameters and variables for the name command Table 93 name command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to name Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 236 Ethernet port management using the CLI Parameters and variables Description ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command lt LINE gt Enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters no name command The no name command clears the port names it resets the field to an empty string The syntax for the no name command is no name port lt portlist gt The no name command is executed in the Interface Confi
194. ead Only Specify a character string to String Community identify the community string for the String SNMPv1 Read Only community for example public or private Re enter character string to verify The default value is public Read Write Specify a character string to Community identify the community string for the String SNMPv1 Read Write community for example public or private Re enter character string to verify The default value is private Trap Receiver Index Select the number of the Trap Receiver to create or modify IP address Specify the network address for the SNMP Manager that is to receive the specified Trap Community Type the Community String for the specified Trap Receiver Re enter Community String to verify VLAN Quick Start Specify the IP of the port based VLAN Quick Start VLAN End Configuring system security For information on configuring system security please see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Rebooting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 315 Rebooting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series You can reboot a unit in stack or an entire stack without erasing any configured switch parameters While rebooting the switch initiates a self
195. ecific objects Selecting objects The types of objects contained in the device view are A standalone switch called a unit in the menus and dialog boxes e A port including the SFP GBIC port Figure 34 Objects in the device view page 129 shows the objects in the device view Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Device Manager window 129 Figure 34 Objects in the device view SFP GBIC slot object Device Manager 6 9b06 192 167 120 29 Device Edit Grap AN QoS Rmon Actions Help SASN NORTEL 2550T PWR Unit or ups Speed 13 5s 7 1 8B 6G 1 19 2 om kan 7 23 31 33 3 38 OH g Chassis aby Down S1 S E T aaa dd ET A I dd Per m4 6 8 wm 2 4 6 18 20 22 26 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Port object Selecting a single object To select a single object gt Click the edge of the object The object is outlined in yellow indicating that it is selected Subsequent activities in Device Manager refer to the selected object Selecting multiple objects For instructions on selecting multiple objects Such as ports or switches see the following table Table 22 Selecting multiple objects To select a block of contiguous ports Drag to select the group of ports To select all ports Choose Edit gt Select gt Ports Viewing information about a GBIC port To
196. ed The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit gt IP dialog box and details about each item on the tab e Globals tab page 253 e Addresses tab page 254 ARP tab page 255 e TCP tab page 256 e TCP Connections tab page 257 e UDP Listeners tab page 257 Globals tab To open the Globals tab use the following procedure From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Figure 92 Globals tab x GOBSE Addresses ARP TCP TCP Connections UDP Listeners DefaultTTL 64 ReasmTimeout 60 sec e The following table describes the Globals tab fields Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 254 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Table 112 Globals tab fields Field and MIB noes er Description association DefaultTTL Default value inserted into the Time To Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol Default value is 64 ReasmTimeout Maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly by the switch Default value is 60 Addresses tab The Addresses tab shows the IP address information for the device To
197. ed and the Duplex fields are independent of MultiLink Trunking VLANs and the STP To configure switch port properties use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Port Management The Port Management page appears Figure 120 Port Management page Configuration gt Port Management Port ea Sening ee Speed Duplex aiz vomfons enebled E Down Onz Enobied 7 Dow Onz Enabled z Dom Onz Enabled x Down Onz Enabled Dow Onz Enabled Dow Onz Enebled Down On Enabled x Down Onz Enabled Down On gt Enabled gt Down On Enabled x Down On gt Enabled Oa Enable vjr Ly Ports 13 24 Pornts2 5 36 Pons37 48 Pors49 50 The following table describes the items on the Port Management page Table 144 Port Management page items Item Range Description Port The switch port number of the corresponding row The values that you set in each switch row affect all switch ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 326 Configuring the switch using web based management Description Status Link Trap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Disabled 1 10Mbs Half 2 10Mbs Full 3 100Mbs Half 4 100Mbs Full
198. ed command 238 default tftp server command 199 Default TTL field 254 Default write community 122 Descr field 250 262 263 306 309 Description field 152 Detection field 176 Device Manager 101 installing on UNIX 111 installing on Windows 103 requirements 101 setting properties 120 Device Manager window 119 120 Device menu 127 Device Name field 124 device view summary 128 device opening 123 diagnostics 229 disable command 92 Disable command 132 disabled port color 131 disabling power 160 167 disabling power on port 161 disabling power on ports 176 download command 230 DTE Power Consumption field 169 DTE Power Status field 168 DTE Power Usage Threshold field 169 duplex command 239 duplex mode 202 237 E Edit command 132 132 Edit menu 127 Edit Selected button 128 EEPROM 40 enable command 91 Enable command 132 Enable field 122 251 enable name 233 enabling power 160 167 enabling power on port 161 enabling power on ports 176 end command 92 Ethernet port management 77 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 front panel 23 exit command 92 Export Data button 133 138 external power source 169 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 382 Index F Fan tab 268 268 feature license file configuring with CLI 41 configuring with Device Manager 42 fiber optic ne
199. ed station is operating in full duplex mode it cannot communicate with the switch To correct this mode mismatch problem use the following procedure 1 Use the Port Management page to disable autonegotiation for the suspect port see Configuring switch port status page 324 2 Manually set the Speed Duplex field to match the speed duplex mode of the connected station You may have to try several settings before you find the correct speed duplex mode of the connected station If the problem persists 1 Disable the autonegotiation feature at the connected station 2 Manually set the speed duplex mode of the connected station to the same speed duplex mode you have manually set for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series port Port interface Ensure that the devices are connected using the appropriate crossover or straight through cable or that autonegotiation is active Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix A DB 9 RS 232 D Console Comm Port connector The Console Comm Port connector is a DB 9 RS 232 D male serial port connector You can use this connector to connect a management station or console terminal to the Ethernet Routing Switch by using a straight through DB 9 to DB 9 standard serial port cable Figure 127 DB 9 Console port connector The following table li
200. ee The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit gt Unit dialog box and details about each item on the tab Unit tab To open the Unit tab From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Unit The Unit dialog box appears with the Unit tab displayed Figure 91 Unit dialog box 192 167 120 28 Unit 1 it Rate Limit Rear Ports Mode Type 771 Descr 24 10 100BaseTx plus 2 10 100 1000 SFP combo ports plus 2 1000BaseT ports Ver 2526T HW 04 SerNum LBNNTMIL440003 BaseNumPorts 28 TotalNumPorts 28 Refresh Close Help The following table describes the Unit tab fields Table 109 Unit tab fields Field Description Type Specifies the type of switch Descr Description of switch Ver Specifies the hardware version number of the switch Sernum Specifies the serial number of the switch BaseNumPorts Specifies the base number of ports TotalNumPorts Specifies the total number of ports Rate Limit tab To open the Rate Limit tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Unit Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing Unit information 251 The Unit dialog box appears with the Unit tab displayed 2 Click the Rate Limit tab The Rate limit tab appears Rate Li
201. ee the technical documentation for this product for detailed installation procedures to be followed by qualified service personnel CAUTION Vorsicht Bitte sofort lesen Sehen Sie nach ob dieses Netzkabel ber den richtigen Stecker verf gt und f r die Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist Falls dieses Kabel nicht f r das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist darf es nicht verwendet werden Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel das die Vorschriften der Zulassungsbeh rden in Ihrem Land erf llt Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enth lt ausf hrliche Installationsanweisungen die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal ausgef hrt werden d rfen Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 32 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware ATTENTION Attention Lisez ceci imm diatement Examinez ce cordon d alimentation pour d terminer s il dispose de la fiche appropri e et s il est bien agr pour utilisation sur votre installation lectrique D barrassez vous en imm diatement s il ne convient pas a l utilisation sur le secteur lectrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez vous un cordon conforme a la r glementation nationale en vigueur Reportez vous a la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des instructions d taill es d insta
202. el Networks 164 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR Table 39 poe poe limit command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Description lt 3 16 gt Enter the maximum number of watts you want for the specified port The range is 3W to 16W the default value is 16W ports Enter the port number you want to disable power on ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port entered with the interface FastEthernet command Displaying PoE configuration using the CLI You display the status for the PoE configuration on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR using the following CLI commands e show poe main status command page 164 e show poe port status command page 165 e show poe power measurement commana page 166 show poe main status command The show poe main status command displays the current PoE configuration of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR and each port PoE settings The syntax for the show poe main status Command is show poe main status Unit The show poe main status command is executed in the User Exec command mode Figure 53 show poe main status page 165 displays sample output from the show poe main status command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Displaying PoE confi
203. eld 260 312 sysName field 260 312 sysObjectID field 260 system default settings resetting to 316 System Description field 152 323 system information 96 97 System Information page 311 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 388 Index System Location field 324 system location naming 322 system name configuring 322 System Object ID field 323 System page 322 system settings modifying 322 system contact 324 system location 324 system name 324 System tab 259 259 System Up Time field 324 sysUpTime field 260 312 T Tab key navigation 88 tables and input forms about 150 technical specifications 375 technical support 20 Telnet 86 Telnet button 128 140 Telnet session 128 140 terminal 91 requirements 86 settings 193 terminal command 193 text conventions 17 TFTP 197 tftp server command 198 time zone setting 69 Timeout field 121 timestamps 68 208 toolbar Device Manager 127 tooltip 132 topology 279 Topology Table tab 280 TotalNumPorts 265 Trace field 122 traffic Gigabit Ethernet 240 Traffic Type field 251 trap log 142 Trap Log button 128 Trap Port field 122 traps 174 power 173 Traps Control field 169 troubleshooting 177 access 91 locations of Help files 143 ping 183 185 PoE 158 port interface 339 port numbers 85 ports 91 power detection type 174 Power tab 172 power
204. elected ports To view or edit the Interface tab for multiple ports use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the ports that you want to edit Press Ctrl left click the ports that you want to configure A yellow outline appears around the selected ports 2 Do one of the following e From the shortcut menu choose Edit From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Port The Interface tab shows port interface statistics Figure 111 Interface tab for multiple ports a 119216712020 Port Dtertaon stan EAP CL EAPOL Advance Pot LAP apac Bndes Port Mane Deser Type Pu Phystddrese Adrat ODLA Lesichengs Litres Autetingetiate f aaroain coated I Cperspeed Aut mam ga Idr tes x s D D 5 G2 B am End Table 139 Interface tab fields for multiple ports page 309 describes the Interface tab fields for multiple ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing and editing multiple port configurations 309 Table 139 Interface tab fields for multiple ports Field Description Index A unique value assigned to each interface The value ranges between 1 and 512 Port Port Id in unit and port format Name Lets you enter a character string to name the port Descr Type of switch and number of ports Type Media ty
205. ement Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a network management system NMS or application Each LLDP station e advertises connectivity and management information about the local station to adjacent stations on the same 802 LAN 802 3 Ethernet with Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 receives network management information from adjacent stations on the same LAN ATTENTION LLDP works in stack mode LLDP makes it possible to discover certain configuration inconsistencies or malfunctions that can result in impaired communications at higher layers For example it can be used to discover duplex mismatches between an IP Phone and the connected switch LLDP is compatible with IETF PROTO MIB IETF RFC 2922 Figure 22 How LLDP works page 75 shows an example of how LLDP works in a network Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Switch management features 75 Figure 22 How LLDP works Router Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Management IP Phone Workstation 1 The Ethernet Routing Switch and router advertise chassis or port IDs and system descriptions to each other 2 The devices store the information about each other in local MIB databases accessible using SNMP 3 A network management system retrieves the data stored by each device a
206. enabled on the port as well If autonegotiation is disabled on a port then the port operates as a standard MDI X port Power over Ethernet on Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR The Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR provide IEEE 802 3af compliant power over the PoE labeled front panel RJ 45 ports The switches provide power discovery and power management on each port basis You can use the PoE ports to provide power to network appliances such as IP Phones wireless access points and video devices You can enable or disable power to individual ports For information about configuring PoE see Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 25261T PWR and 2550T PWR page 157 LED display panel Figure 6 LED display panel page 28 shows the LED display panel of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series See Table 2 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series LED descriptions page 28 for a description of the LEDs Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 28 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware Figure 6 LED display panel Table 2 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series LED descriptions Up 28 or Rear port Fast Flashing Down 27 Rear port Fast Flashing er Status Switch is not connected to a power source RJ45 SFP This port is set to operate at 1 Gb s Uplink
207. ense to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software You obtain no rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement You are responsible for the selection of the Software and for the installation of use of and results obtained from the Software 1 Licensed Use of Software Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level whichever is applicable To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment CFE Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE as applicable Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose publish or disseminate Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement Customer shall not a use copy modify transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized b reverse assemble reverse compile reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software c create derivative works or modifications unless expressly authorized or d sublicense rent or lease the Software Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficia
208. er 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 373 Command Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration IP Multicast NN47215 503 vlan create lt 1 4094 gt vlan delete lt 1 4094 gt vlan igmp lt 1 4094 gt snooping enable disable proxy enable disable robust value lt value gt query interval lt time gt vi members lt portlist gt v2 members lt portlist gt vlan members add remove lt 1 4094 gt lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 vlan mgmt lt 1 4094 gt vlan name lt 1 4094 gt lt line gt vian ports lt portlist gt tagging enable disable tagAll untagAll tagPvidOnly untagPvidOnly pvid lt 1 4094 gt remarking enable disable filter unregistered frames enable disable filter untagged frame enable disable priority lt 0 7 gt name lt line gt
209. er Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR 157 Diagnosing and correcting PoE problems 158 Status codes on PoE ports 158 Configuring PoE switch parameters using the CLI 158 poe poe pd detect type command 158 poe poe power usage threshold command 159 poe poe trap command 160 no poe trap command 160 Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI 160 no poe shutdown command 161 poe poe shutdown command 161 poe poe priority command 162 poe poe limit command 163 Displaying PoE configuration using the CLI 164 show poe main status command 164 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Contents 9 show poe port status command 165 show poe power measurement command 166 Configuring PoE using web based management 167 Displaying and configuring power management for the switch 168 Displaying and configuring power management for the ports 170 Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager 172 PoE tab for a single unit 172 Device Manager display for PoE ports 174 PoE tab for ports 175 System configuration using the CLI 177 Configuring the switch IP address subnet mask and default gateway 177 IP notation 177 Assigning and clearing IP addresses 178 Pinging 183 Resetting the switch to default configuration 184 Using DNS to ping and telnet 184 show ip dns command 1
210. er standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch e The configuration file also duplicates any settings that exist for any GBIC that is installed in the donor switch e If you use the configuration file to configure another switch that has the same GBIC model installed the configuration file settings can also apply to and override the existing GBIC settings Table 150 Parameters not saved to the configuration file page 333 describes the parameters that are not saved to the configuration file Table 150 Parameters not saved to the configuration file These parameters are not saved In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask Default Gateway Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Enabling and disabling autosave The Configuration File page also lets you enable and disable the autosave feature on the switch To enable or disable autosave use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Configuration File The Configuration File page appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 334 Configuring the switch using web based management 2 Under Autosave Configuration choose Enabled or Disabled from the drop down list 3 Click Submit End Configuring port commu
211. eries Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 38 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking This chapter includes information about the stacking features such as stack capabilities stacking functionality delivery stack configuration and Auto Unit Replacement This chapter contains information about the following topics Stacking capabilities page 39 Stacking functionality delivery page 40 Stack configuration page 45 e Auto Unit Replacement page 54 Stacking capabilities The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series contain two built in rear ports that can be used as stacking cascade ports to enable a stack of up to eight units A stack can consist of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR units The stack ports on ERS 2500 series switches provide 4Gbps FDX stack bandwidth for an aggregate of up to 32Gbps for a stack of eight units A stack of Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches can also consist of a mix of stack pre enabled units as well as non pre enab
212. eries Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show sntp command page 208 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 368 Appendix D Command List Command Page No show spanning tree mstp port statistics Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt portlist gt Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree msip statistics Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLAN
213. eries 33 Caution ERM MMITBRAK SV ARB A KAS CMI RS MAMI LETIA RT HOMER MIE A OW TINS DE SDRAM PE b LERH KAZERNA TARA brEt ZEADNK RK EPIC EH ON e722 EH Fe CMA FS ARGORMNBHRICOXELTIL RRAHRMABL ORO ARBBELRIKY UA AR VIOPBMRCHOTFAU WARNING Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this device The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency WARNING Vorsicht Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Ger t kann nur durch Ziehen des Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden Die Netzsteckdose an die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist muB sich stets an einem Ort befinden der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zuganglich ist WARNING Avertissement Le d branchement du cordon d alimentation constitue le seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension Le cordon d alimentation doit donc toujours tre branch dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension en cas d urgence WARNING Advertencia La Unica forma de desconectar la alimentaci n de este dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentaci n El cable de alimentaci n siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicaci n que permita acceder al cable de forma rapida y segura en caso de emergencia Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Cop
214. erver command page 197 e default ip bootp server command page 197 boot command The boot command performs a soft boot of the switch The syntax for the boot command is boot default The boot command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 60 boot command parameters and variables page 196 describes the parameters and variables for the boot command Table 60 boot command parameters and variables Parameters and aad Description variables default Restores switch to factory default settings after rebooting ATTENTION When you reset to factory defaults the last reset count and reason for last reset will not be set to factory defaults ip bootp server command The ip bootp server command configures BootP on the current instance of the switch or server The syntax for the ip bootp server command is ip bootp server default ip last disable always The ip bootp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 61 ip bootp server command parameters and variables page 197 describes the parameters and variables for the ip bootp server command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Customizing your system 197 Table 61 ip bootp server command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p las
215. es but the User EXEC mode The commands in this mode allow you to perform basic switch level management tasks such as downloading the software image setting passwords and booting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series The Privileged EXEC mode is also referred to as privExec mode The Global Configuration mode and the Interface Configuration mode allow you to change the configuration of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Changes made in these command modes are immediately applied to the switch configuration and saved to NVRAM The Global Configuration commands allow you to set and display general configurations for the switch such as the IP address SNMP parameters the Telnet access and VLANs The Global Configuration mode is also referred to as config mode The Interface Configuration commands allow you to configure parameters for each port such as speed and duplex mode The Interface Configuration mode is also referred to as config if mode Figure 23 CLI command mode hierarchy page 83 provides an illustration of the hierarchy of Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series CLI command modes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks CLI command modes 83 Figure 23 CLI command mode hierarchy User Exec exec Privileged EXEC privExec Global Configuration config Interface Configuratio
216. ess To change the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to system defaults Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Reset to Default The reset to default warning message displays Figure 116 Reset to Default page message Microsoft Internet Explorer Are you sure you want to reset the Swatch to defaults End Logging out of the management interface To log out of the Web based management interface use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Logout A logout message displays Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Logging out of the management interface 317 Figure 117 Logout message Microsoft Internet Explorer X 2 Are you sure you want to logout 2 Do one of the following e Click OK to log out e Click Cancel to return to the web based management interface home page ATTENTION If you have not configured system password security a reset returns you to the home page If you have configured system password security a reset returns you to a log on page for details on configuring management passwords see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview Sy
217. f the LEDs For a full description of the LEDs for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series see LED display panel page 27 The ports on the device view are color coded to show port status Table 23 Port color codes page 131 describes the status assigned to each color Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Device Manager window 131 I Le ee Table 23 Port color codes Color Description Green Port is operating Red Port has been manually disabled Orange Port has no link In addition the Help menu provides a legend that identifies the port colors and their meanings as shown in Figure 36 Color port legend page 131 ATTENTION The additional colors displayed in the Device Manager legend are not applicable to the Ethernet Routing Swith 2500 Series Figure 36 Color port legend Online Support Device vity Of Half Duplex G Bu About D Device Manager E Down No Link E Standby Hi Testing Unmanageable E Loopback Shortcut menus Each object in the device view has a shortcut menu that appears when you right click a selected object The switch unit shortcut menu provides access to basic hardware information about the switch and to the graphing dialog boxes for the switch Figure 37 Switch unit shortcut menu Unit 1 Edit v Sh
218. faults Clicking on the Nortel logo opens the corporate home page in a new Web browser Management page When you click a menu option the corresponding management page appears Figure 48 Console page page 150 shows the page displayed for the Administration gt Security gt Console option Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 150 Using the Web based management interface Figure 48 Console page Administration gt Security gt Console Console Switch Password Setting Console Switch Password Type None z Read Only Switch Password fuser Read Write Switch Password secure Console Stack Password Setting Console Stack Password Type None Read Only Stack Password user Read Write Stack Password secure ATTENTION The Console Stack Password Setting section is active only when the switch is in the stack mode A page is composed of one or more of the following elements e Tables and input forms The gray cells in a page are display only and white cells are input fields e Check boxes You enable or disable a selection by clicking a check box When a check mark is displayed in the box that selection is enabled You disable a selection by clicking the checked box e Icons and buttons Icons and buttons perform an action concerning the displayed page or the switch So
219. figuration the previous configuration of the new unit is lost It is overwritten with the restored configuration from the stack e This feature can be disabled enabled at any time using the CLI The default mode is ENABLE e Customer log messages are provided ATTENTION After booting a stack use the CLI command show stack auto unit replacement from a unit console to find out if that unit is ready for replacement AUR function The CFG mirror image is a mirror of a CFG image in FLASH of a unit in a stack The mirror image does not reside in the same unit with the CFG image The unit that contains the CFG image is called the Associated Unit AU of the CFG mirror image The MAC Address of the AU is called the Associated Mac Address AMA of the CFG mirror image An active CFG Mirror Image is a CFG mirror image that has its AU in the stack An INACTIVE CFG Mirror Image is a CFG mirror image for which the associated AU has been removed from the stack When a CFG mirror image becomes INACTIVE the INACTIVE CFG mirror image is copied to another unit The stack always keeps two copies of an INACTIVE CFG mirror image in the stack in case one unit is removed the other unit can still provide the backup INACTIVE CFG mirror image Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 56 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500
220. figuration and Management NN47215 505 sntp enable sntp enable commana page 209 sntp server primary address lt A B C D gt sntp server primary address command page 209 sntp server secondary address lt A B C D gt sntp server secondary address commana page 210 sntp sync interval lt 0 168 gt sntp sync interval command page 211 sntp sync now sntp sync now command page 211 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 371 Command Page No spanning tree mstp max hop lt 100 4000 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series forward time lt 4 30 gt max age lt 6 40 gt Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and pathcost type bits16 bits32 priority MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 0000 10000 20000 E F0000 tx hold count lt 1 10 gt version stp compatible rstp mstp add vlan lt 1 4094 gt remove vlan lt 1 4094 gt msti lt 1 7 gt region config id sel region name region version spanning tree mstp msti lt 1 7 gt port Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt portlist gt enable Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 spanning tree mstp msti lt 1 7 gt port Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt portlist gt disable Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree
221. g 129 multiple ports editing 307 N name command 235 Name field 306 309 naming ports 235 netmask 177 178 NetMask field 254 Netscape Navigator software version requirements 145 network administrator contact information 322 324 network configuration configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub 37 network protocol standards compatibil ity 376 network security protecting system integrity 146 new table entry creating 133 New Unit Number field 155 MAC address forwarding database table 98NextBootDefaultGateway field 261 mac address table aging time command 99NextBootLoadProtocol field 261 MacAddr field 266 281 MacAddress field 255 main menu headings and options icons ManagementVlanld field 260 ManualSyncRequest field 277 Manufacturing Date Code field 152 Max Traps in Log field 122 Maximum statistics 135 MDA viewing 129 NextBootMgmiProtocol field 260 NextBootNetMask field 266 NextBootpAddr field 266 NextSyncTime field 277 NmmCurNum field 280 NmmLstChg field 280 NmmMaxNum field 280 no auto negotiation advertisements command 247 no autosave enable command 207 no autotopology command 216 no banner command 202 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 384 Index no clock summer time command 214 no clock time zone command 213 no command 88 90 no flowcontrol comm
222. g Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Network configuration examples 35 Figure 8 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a desktop switch Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T _Ehomet t Routing Switch 2526T PWR Server Up to 24 desktop users Server WLAN AP Up to 24 desktop users Key 10 Mb s 100 Mb s 1000 Mb s Branch office workgroup switch application Figure 9 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a workgroup switch page 36 shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a workgroup switch in an enterprise branch office environment Desktop workstations and servers are connected directly to the switch ports Alternatively an ERS 2500 series switch that supports Power over Ethernet PoE can provide connectivity and power to IP Phones and Wireless LAN Access Points WLAN APs in addition to desktop workstations and servers The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switch can optionally be stacked up to 8 units to form a single virtual switch providing up to 384 10 100Mb s connections and 16 1000Mb s connections Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 36 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware Figure 9 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series
223. g table describes the Local Port tab fields Table 133 Local Port tab fields Field Description PortNum Port number PortldSubtype The type of port identifier encoding used in the associated Portld object e interfaceAlias portComponent e macAddress e networkAddress e interfaceName e agentCircuitld local Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 294 Configuring the switch using Device Manager S SLL ee Description The string value used to identify the port component associated with a given port in the local system PortDesc The string value used to identify the 802 LAN station port description associated with the local system If the local agent supports IETF RFC 2863 the PortDesc object has the same value as the ifDescr object End Local Management tab With the Local Management tab you can view LLDP management properties for the local system Use the following procedure to open the Local Management tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Click the Local Management tab The Local Management tab appears Figure 106 Local Management tab Gobas Port Tx Seats RX Stats Local System Local Port Local Managn
224. gateway command sets the IP default gateway address to zeros 0 The syntax for the no ip default gateway command is no ip default gateway The no ip default gateway command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no ip default gateway command has no parameters or variables ATTENTION When you change the IP gateway address you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web You also may disable any new Telnet connection required to connect to the serial Console port to configure a new IP Gateway address Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring the switch IP address subnet mask and default gateway 181 default ip default gateway command The default ip default gateway command sets the IP default gateway address to all zeros 000 000 000 000 The syntax for the default ip default gateway command is default ip default gateway The default ip default gateway command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default ip default gateway command has no parameters or variables show ip command The show ip command displays the IP configurations specifically BootP mode switch address subnet mask and gateway address This command displays the these parameters for what is configured what is in use and the last BootP The syntax for the show ip comman
225. ge 220 describes the parameters and variables for the Ildp config notification command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 220 System configuration using the CLI Table 78 IIdp config notification command parameters and variables Parameters and a a Description variables lt portlist gt Specifies the ports affected by the command no lidp config notification command no lldp config notification command disables config notification The syntax for the no lldp config notification command is no lldp port lt portlist gt config notification The no lldp config notification command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 79 no Ildp config notification command parameters and variables page 220 describes the parameters and variables for the no Ildp config notification command Table 79 no Ildp config notification command parameters and variables Parameters and P Description variables Specifies the ports affected by the command default Ildp config notification command The default lldp config notification command sets config notification to its default value disabled The syntax for the default lldp config notification command is default lldp port lt portlist gt config notification The default lldp config notification command is execute
226. gement home page From the Device Manager you can access the web based management home page To open the web based management home page use the following procedure gt Do one of the following e From the Device Manager main menu choose Actions gt Open Home Page e On the toolbar click the Open Home Page button The web based management home page appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 142 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 46 Web based management home page NORTEL Administration gt System Information Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T cian Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T HW 0A FW 1 0 0 12 gt Su eret Routing Swite i 0 gt Configuration sysDescription SW 10 059 BN 59 c Nortel Networks sysUpTime 14 Hours 13 Minutes 22 Seconds sysContact sysName sysLocation Administration System Information Quick Start gt Security Logout gt Reset Reset To Default gt Support Trap log You can configure an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to send SNMP generic traps When the Device Manager is running any traps received are recorded in the trap log You set the maximum number of entries in the trap log using the Properties dialog box DCAM 6270493 page 120 The default number of trap log entries is 500 To view the trap log use the
227. get device The local IP address must be set before issuing the ping command You can ping a host using either its IP address or hostname The syntax for the ping command is ping lt A B C D or Hostname gt The ping command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 52 ping command parameters and variables page 186 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 186 System configuration using the CLI Table 52 ping command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Description lt A B C D or Specify Hostname gt the IP address of the target device in dotted decimal notation the hostname of the device to ping The hostname can be a simple name such as fred in this case the DNS domain name if set is appended Or the hostname can be a full hostname such as fred ca nortel com If the device receives the packet it sends a ping reply When the switch receives the reply it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being used If no reply is received a message indicates that the address is not responding Figure 60 ping command responses page 186 displays sample ping responses Figure 60 ping command responses 255 T PWR gt ping 192 167 120 29 Ho habl st is reachable
228. ging RMON Ethernet RMON History Applications Port Mirroring Rate Limiting EAPOL Security MAC Address Security IGMP VLAN Spanning Tree Multilink Trunk Link Aggregation Administration System Information Quick Start Security Logout Reset Reset to Default Support Help Release Notes Manuals Upgrade Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Logging in to the web based management interface 149 Tools are provided in the menu to assist you in navigating the web based management interface CAUTION Web browser capabilities such as page bookmarking refresh and page forward and page back function as they would in any other Web site However these capabilities do not enhance the functionality of the web based management interface Nortel recommends that you use only the navigation tools provided in the management interface Table 31 Menu icons page 149 describes the icons that appear on the menu Table 31 Menu icons This icon identifies a menu title Click on this icon to display its options Button or icon 2 This icon identifies a menu title option Click on this icon to display the corresponding page This icon identifies a menu title option with a hyperlink to related pages This icon is linked to an action for example logout reset or reset to system de
229. gotiate a specific speed and duplex value In these situations the switch can allow for attachment at an operating mode other than its highest supported value For example if the switch advertises only a 100 Mbps full duplex capability on a specific link the link goes active only if the neighboring device is also capable of autonegotiating a 100 Mbps full duplex capability This prevents mismatched speed and duplex modes if customers disable autonegotiation on the neighboring device ATTENTION The CANA feature is available only for built in 10 100 Ethernet ports and combo ports not available for rear ports You can only enable CANA through the CLI When CANA is enabled on a port autonegotiation status is displayed as Custom in the web based management interface High speed flow control The high speed flow control feature lets you control traffic and avoid congestion on the gigabit full duplex link If the receive port buffer becomes full the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series issues a flow control signal to the device at the other end of the link to suspend transmission When the receive buffer is no longer full the switch issues a signal to resume the transmission You can choose Symmetric or Asymmetric flow control mode High speed flow control cannot be configured unless you set Autonegotiation to Disabled on the port and the speed duplex is at 1000 full Two high speed flow control modes are available Symmetric mode T
230. guration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 260 Configuring the switch using Device Manager S enn The following table describes the System tab fields Table 117 System tab fields Field Description sysDescr The assigned system description sysUpTime The time since the system was last booted sysObjectID The unique sysObjectID OID assigned to the device sysContact Type the contact information in this case an e mail address for the system administrator sysName Type the name of this device sysLocation Type the physical location of this device SerNum The switch serial number AuthenticationTraps Click to enable or disable When you enable SNMP traps are sent to trap receivers for all SNMP access authentication When you disable no traps are received To view traps click the Trap toolbar button ReBoot By default the switch is in the Running mode The reboot command initiates a hardware reset AutoPVID Click to enable or disable When you enable AutoPVID is activated When you disable AutoPVID is inactivated ManagementVlanld The current management VLAN ID StackInsertionUnitNu This field specifies the unit number to be assigned to the mber next unit that joins the stack when in stack mode AutoUnitReplacement Click to enable or disable the auto unit replacement Enabled feature NextBootMgmt The transport protocol s to use afte
231. guration command mode Table 94 no name command parameters and variables page 236 describes the parameters and variables for the no name command Table 94 no name command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to clear of names ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command default name command The default name command clears the port names it resets the field to an empty string The syntax for the default name command is default name port lt portlist gt The default name command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 95 default name command parameters and variables page 237 describes the parameters and variables for the default name command o Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Setting port speed 237 Table 95 default name command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to clear of names ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command Setting port speed You can set the speed and duplex mode for a port This section covers e speed c
232. guration using the CLI 165 Figure 53 show poe main status command output 55 T PWR show poe main status PoE Main Status Stand alone hvadiabis DIE Power 168 Watts DIE Power Status Normal DTE Power Consumption 4 Watts DTE Power Usage Threshold 86 z Traps Control Status Enable PD Detect Type 862 3af and Legacy Power Source Present AC Only AC Power Status Present DC Power Status Not Present 2558 T PURH ATTENTION The Power Source Present listing displays the current power source for the switch AC Only show poe port status command The show poe port status command displays the status power status power limit and port priority of each port The syntax for the show poe port status command is show poe port status port lt portlist gt The show poe port status command is executed in the User Exec command mode The DTE Power Status displays error messages if the port is not providing power The following messages can appear e Detecting port detecting IP device requesting power e Delivering power port delivering requested power to device Invalid PD port detecting device that is not valid to request power e Deny low priority power disabled from port because of port setting and demands on power budget e Overload power disabled from port because port is overloaded Test port in testing mode e Error none of the other conditions apply Table 40 show poe port st
233. gure all ports simultaneously ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command full half auto Sets duplex to e full full duplex mode e half half duplex mode e auto autonegotiation ATTENTION When you set the duplex mode for autonegotiation ensure that the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation default duplex command The default duplex command sets the duplex operation for a port to the factory default duplex value The syntax for the default duplex command is default duplex port lt portlist gt The default duplex command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 240 Ethernet port management using the CLI Table 99 default duplex command parameters and variables page 240 describes the parameters and variables for the default duplex command Table 99 default duplex command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Description port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to reset the duplex mode to factory default values Enter the port numbers you want to configure or all to configure all ports simultaneously The default value is autonegotiation ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses
234. h the configured NTP server at bootup and at user configurable periods thereafter the default sync interval is 24 hours The first synchronization is not performed until network connectivity is established Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Switch management features 69 The SNTP supports primary and secondary NTP servers The system tries the secondary NTP server only if the primary NTP server is unresponsive Configuring with CLI To use the CLI to configure the SNTP feature use the following procedure Step Action 1 Set the primary and secondary NTP server 2 Enable the SNTP 3 Display the UTC time 4 Optionally to ensure the synchronization happens immediately force a synchronization End Setting local time zone The SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time UTC for all time synchronizations so it is not affected by different time zones For the switch to report the correct time for your local time zone and daylight savings time you must use the following commands e clock time zone page 213 e no clock time zone page 213 e clock summer time page 213 e no clock summer time page 214 e show clock time zone page 214 e Figure 75 show clock summer time page 215 Using DNS to ping and Telnet You can use the DNS client to ping or Telnet to a host se
235. h your console terminal baud rate you lose communication with the configuration interface when you click Submit 2 Select from the list 3 Click Submit End Configuring Rate Limiting Broadcast Rate Limiting is a box oriented feature which lets you configure threshold limits for either broadcast or multicast packets ingressing on a port for a given time interval in packets secondq If the configured threshold exceeds on a port the switch drops extra packets received No SNMP trap or syslog is generated in case of congestion Configuring Rate Limiting To configure Rate Limiting using the web based management system use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Application gt Rate Limiting The Rate Limiting page appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 336 Configuring the switch using web based management Figure 126 Rate Limiting page Application gt Rate Limiting Rate Limiting Configuration unit fJ234567 Pon Packet Type Limit Switch Both gt a fo J Stack Both bd The following table describes the items on the Rate Limiting page Table 152 Rate Limiting page items Section Description Port The port number that corresponds to the selected switch or stack Packet Type Select the type of packe
236. hassis e chassisComponent e interfaceAlias portComponent e macAddress e networkAddress interfaceName e local Chassisld chassis ID SysName local system name SysDesc local system description SysCapSupported identifies the system capabilities supported on the local system SysCapEnabled identifies the system capabilities that are enabled on the local system End Local Port tab With the Local Port tab you can view LLDP port properties for the local system Use the following procedure to open the Local Port tab Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 293 Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the Local Port tab The Local Port tab appears Figure 105 Local Port tab 192 168 249 46 LLDP xj Gobuls Port TX Sats RX Stats Local System LOCA PER Local Management Neighbor Neighbor Mgmt Address Unknown TLY Organizational Defined Info E E ee Se ma i meena enren Pots F9 25 00 04 Po j macadres OO iF9 36 d0 16 Port 22 ijz mscddress 00 19 285 d0 17 a 1 24 msciddress O0 11 f9 35 d0 18 Port 24 a Blo The followin
237. he default autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol The syntax for the default autotopology command is default autotopology The default autotopology command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default autotopology command has no parameters or values show autotopology settings The show autotopology settings command displays information on the Autotopology configuration The syntax for the show autotopology settings command is show autotopology settings The show autotopology settings command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show autotopology settings command has no parameters or variables Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using the CLI 217 Figure 76 show autotopology settings command output page 217 displays a sample output of the show autotopology settings command Figure 76 show autotopology settings command output 2526T lt config gt tshow autotopology settings futotopology Enabled Last NMM Table Change days 20 53 44 Maximum NMM Table Entries 66 Current NMM Table Entries 2 2526T lt config gt t show autotopology nmm table The show autotopology nmm table command displays information about the network management module NMM table The syntax for the show autotopology nmm table c
238. he show sys info command is show sys info The show sys info command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show sys info command has no parameters or variables Figure 25 show sys info command output page 97 displays sample output from the show sys info command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Managing basic system information 97 Figure 25 show sys info command output 2526TCconfig gt tshow sys info Operation Mode Switch MAC Address 66 19 69 AF C8 88 Reset Count 31 Last Reset Type Software Download Autotopo logy Enabled Pluggable Port 25 None Pluggable Port 26 None sysDescr Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T HW A FW 1 0 0 9 SH v4 0 0 001 Mfg Date 20060926 HW Dev Serial LBNNIMJL44606J sysObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 72 1 sysUpT ime O days 61 53 61 sysNtpT ime SNTP not synchronized sysServices 3 sysContact sysName sysLocation To change the system contact name or location see the snmp server command see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show tech command The show tech command displays detailed system information The syntax for the show tech command is show tech The show tech command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show tech com
239. he time from any RFC 2030 compliant NTP SNTP server ATTENTION If you have trouble using this feature try various NTP servers Some NTP servers may be overloaded or currently inoperable show sntp commana page 208 sntp enable commana page 209 e no snip enable commana page 209 sntp server primary address commana page 209 sntp server secondary address command page 210 e no snip server commana page 210 sntp sync now commana page 211 sntp sync interval commana page 211 e default sntp command page 212 show sntp command The show sntp command displays the SNTP information as well as the configured NTP servers The syntax for the show sntp command is show sntp The show sntp command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show sntp command has no parameters or variables Figure 73 show sntp command output page 209 displays sample output from the show sntp command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol 209 Figure 73 show sntp command output 2526T Seang ig tishow sntp SNIP Status Disabled Pr amare server address 6 6 6 6 Secondary server address 6 6 6 6 Sync interval 24 hours Last sync source Primary server sync failures a Secondary server
240. heir explanations e Detecting port detecting IP device requesting power e Delivering power port delivering requested power to device e Disabled port power state disabled Invalid PD port detecting device that is not valid to request power Deny low priority power disabled from port because of port setting and demands on power budget e Overload power disabled from port because port is overloaded e Test port in testing mode which is set using SNMP e Error an unspecified error condition Configuring PoE switch parameters using the CLI You configure power parameters for each Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR using the CLI You can configure the DC power source the power pairs and the power usage with this management system This section contains information about the following topics e poe poe pd detect type commana page 158 poe poe power usage threshold command page 159 e poe poe trap command page 160 e no poe trap commana page 160 poe poe pd detect type command The poe poe pd detect type command sets the method the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR uses to detect the power devices connected to the front ports The syntax for the poe poe pd detect type command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring PoE switch parameters using the CLI 159
241. help e Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install recommended for those with limited disk space e Select Help to install only the online help e Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation 5 Click Next If you did not select Custom installation in step 4 then the Choose Install Folder dialog box appears See step 8 If you selected Custom installation in step 4 then the Feature Sets dialog box appears Feature Sets dialog box Java Device Manager install Set Custom y T Choose Install Sets Application r a Vi Passport 1K Help V Passport 8K Help B 7 Passport 8300 Help s V Passport 1424 Help e V Passport 1600 Help x V BavStack 325 Help Ra 4 o gt r Description This installs the application features only without help e InstallAnywhere by Zero G xxxl Cancel Previous Next LS 6 Select which features to install from the feature sets list 7 Click Next The Choose Install Folder dialog box appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 116 Getting Started with Device Manager Choose Install Folder dialog box Java Device Manager Choose Install Folder Where Would You Like to Install fhomefadmin JOM P aeoe maes Restore Default Folder Choose A Choose Install Folder f
242. herefore you do not have to travel to the remote site to reconfigure the switch Initiate the reload command before you start the switch configuration commands Once you initiate the command in the CLI the following message appears Reload y n Enter yes at this prompt to set the switch reload The following warning message then appears Warning the switch has been set to reload in lt xx gt minutes Current configuration has NOT been saved Configuration must be explicitly saved Once the reload timer expires the switch resets reloads the last saved configuration and re enables the autosave feature The syntax for the reload command is reload force minutes to wait lt 1 60 gt cancel describes the parameters and variables for the interface command Table 13 reload command parameters and variables Parameters Description and variables P force Instructs the switch to skip the reload confirmation prompt minutes to wait Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch lt 1 60 gt reloads itself The default wait time is set at 10 minutes cancel Aborts all scheduled switch reloads The reload command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode shutdown command The shutdown command lets you safely shut down and power off the switch Once the shutdown command is initiated the switch saves the current configuration and instructs users to power off the switch within the specified
243. his mode lets both GBIC port and its link partner to send flow control pause frames to each other When a pause frame is received by either the GBIC port or its link partner the port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause release control frame is received Both devices on the link must support this mode when it is selected Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Other features 79 Asymmetric mode This mode lets the link partner send flow control pause frames to the GBIC port When a pause frame is received the receiving port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause release control frame is received In this mode the GBIC port is disabled from transmitting pause frames to its link partner Use this mode when the GBIC port is connected to a buffered repeater device You can choose a high speed flow control mode using CLI commands For more information about the commands see Enabling flow control page 240 Rate Limiting Configuration The Rate Limiting feature lets you configure the threshold limits for broadcast and multicast packets ingressing on a port for a given time interval The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series drops any packets received above the thresh
244. iewname gt no snmp trap link status port lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 no ssh no ssh dsa auth Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 363 Command no ssh dsa auth key no ssh dsa host key no ssh pass auth no sntp enable no sntp server lt primary secondary gt no spanning tree mstp msti lt 1 7 gt port lt portlist gt no spanning tree port lt portlist gt no telnet access Source ip lt 1 10 gt no tftp server no vian lt 1 4094 gt no web server password aging time day lt 1 2730 gt password security ping lt A B C D or Hostname gt ping lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt datasize lt 64 4096 gt count lt 1 9999 gt continuous timeout t lt 1 120 gt interval lt 1 60 gt debug port mirroring mode disable Xrx Xtx XrxOrXtx monitor port lt portlist gt mirror port X lt portlist gt Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing
245. iguration process choose another option from the main menu End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 157 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR The Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR and 2526T PWR provide IEEE 802 3af compliant power over half of the front panel RJ 45 ports located on the left hand side of the front panel The switch provides power discovery power management and statistics on power use on each port and each switch basis You can use the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to provide power to network appliances such as IP telephones wireless access points and video devices The Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR provide Power over Ethernet for 12 and 24 ports with respectively The switches only support PoE on the lower numbered ports identified by a red border The switches provide a maximum of 168 Watts of power to PoE ports Adequate power is available to supply on average 7 Watts for each port on the 2550T PWR and 14 Watts for each port on the 2526T PWR A maximum of 15 4 Watts is available on any port for any given device The Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR and 2526T PWR supply data terminal equipment DTE power only on signal pins By default power is allocated based on real time measurements If the to
246. ile this action is taking place Clicking the Stop button interrupts the polling process Export Data Exports information to a file you specify You can B then import this file into a text editor or spreadsheet for further analysis ATTENTION Not all buttons appear in all the dialog boxes Editing objects You can edit objects and values in the Device Manager device view in the following ways e Select an object on the toolbar click the Edit Selected button el Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 134 Getting Started with Device Manager The Edit dialog box appears for that object From a switch or port shortcut menu choose Edit The Edit dialog box appears for that object When you change the value in a box the changed value is displayed in bold However changes are not applied to the running configuration until you click Apply ATTENTION Many dialog boxes contain a Refresh button After you apply changes to fields click Refresh to display the new information in the dialog box Working with statistics and graphs Device Manager tracks a wide range of statistics for the switch and each port You can view and graph statistics for a single object or multiple objects For information about the statistics tracked for the switch and ports see Statistics for sing
247. ine Help is available at all levels Entering a portion of the command space and a question mark at the prompt results in a list of all options for that command See help command page 89 for more information about specific types of Help Basic navigation This section discusses basic navigation around the CLI and between the command modes As you see the CLI incorporates various shortcut commands and keystrokes to simplify its use This section contains information about the following topics e General navigation commands page 88 e Keystroke navigation page 88 help command page 89 e no command page 90 e default command page 90 logout command page 90 enable command page 91 e configure command page 91 interface command page 91 disable command page 92 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 88 CLI Basics e end command page 92 exit command page 92 e reload command page 93 e shutdown command page 94 General navigation commands When you enter at any point in the CLI session the system retrieves help information for whatever portion of the command you entered thus far See help command page 89 for more information The system records the last command in a CLI session However the last command is no
248. information for constructing the various TLVs to be sent The LLDP remote system MIB stores the information received from remote LLDP agents Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Ethernet port management features 77 LLDPDU and TLV error handling LLDPDUs and TLVs that contain detectable errors are discarded TLVs that are not recognized but that also contain no basic format errors are assumed to be validated and are stored for possible later retrieval by network management Configuring LLDP using the CLI For information about configuring LLDP using the CLI see Configuring LLDP using the CLI page 77 Ethernet port management features Autosensing and autonegotiation The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is an autosensing and autonegotiating device The term autosense refers to the ability of a port to sense the speed of an attached device e The term autonegotiation refers to a standardized protocol IEEE 802 3u that exists between two IEEE 802 3u capable devices Autonegotiation lets the switch select the best of soeed and duplex modes Autosensing is used when the attached device is not capable of autonegotiation or is using a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802 3u standard In this case because it is not possible to sense the duplex mode of the attached
249. ion instance unique only for the OrgDeflnfoOUl and Ido RemOrgDeflnfoSubtype of the same remote system An agent is encouraged to assign monotonically increasing index values to new entries starting with one after each reboot It is unlikely that the l dpbRemOrgDeflinfolndex wraps between reboots OrdDefinfo The string value used to identify the organizationally defined information of the remote system The encoding for this object is the same as that defined for SnmpAdminString TC End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 302 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 303 Configuring ports using Device Manager This chapter describes how to use Device Manager to configure ports on an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series The windows displayed when you configure a single port differ from the ones displayed when you configure multiple ports However the options are similar This section covers e Viewing and editing a single port configuration page 303 e Viewing and editing multiple port configurations page 307 Viewing and editing a single port configuration To view or edit the configura
250. ip gt port lt 1 65535 gt v1 v2c v3 lt community string gt location name user engine id lt snmpEnginelD gt lt User id gt view lt view name gt no snmp server no snmp server authentication trap no snmp server community ro rw lt community string gt no snmp server contact no snmp server host lt host ip gt v1 v2c v3 no snmp server location lt text gt no snmp server name lt text gt no snmp server user engine id lt engineid gt lt username gt Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 no snmp server view lt v
251. ip netmask command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default ip netmask command has no parameters or variables no ip netmask command The no ip netmask command sets the subnet mask for a switch to all zeros 000 000 000 000 The syntax forthe no ip netmask command is no ip netmask Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 180 System configuration using the CLI LLL ee The no ip netmask command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no ip netmask command has no parameters or variables ip default gateway command The ip default gateway command sets the IP default gateway address for a switch The syntax for the ip default gateway command is ip default gateway lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt The ip default gateway command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 48 ip default gateway command parameters and variables page 180 describes the parameters and variables forthe ip default gateway command Table 48 ip default gateway command parameters and variables Parameters and ar f Description variables XXX XXX XXX XXX Enter the dotted decimal IP address of the default IP gateway ATTENTION When you change the IP gateway you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web no ip default gateway command The no ip default
252. iption variables lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of a DNS server The default value is 0 0 0 0 ip domain name command The ip domain name command sets the system s DNS domain name The syntax for the ip domain name command is ip domain name lt LINE gt The ip domain name command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 55 ip domain name command parameters and variables page 188 describes the parameters and variables for the ip domain name command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 188 System configuration using the CLI Table 55 ip domain name command parameters and variables Parameters and i Description variables p lt LINE gt Enter a DNS domain name The default value for this command is an empty string no ip domain name command The no ip domain name command clears the system s DNS domain name sets it to an empty string The syntax for the no ip domain name command is no ip domain name The no ip domain name command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no ip domain name command has no parameters or variables default ip domain name command The default ip domain name command clears the system s DNS domain name set it to an empty string The syntax for the default ip domain name command is
253. isplaying system information The show sys info command displays the current system characteristics ATTENTION You must have SNTP enabled and configured to display GMT time The syntax for the show sys info command is show sys info The show sys info command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show sys info command has no parameters or variables Figure 65 show sys info command output page 195 displays sample output from the show sys info command Figure 65 show sys info command output 2526T lt config gt tshow sys info Operation Mode Switch MAC Address 66 19 69 AF C8 88 Reset Count 31 Last Reset Type Software Download Autotopo logy Enabled Pluggable Port 25 None Pluggable Port 26 None sysDescr Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T HW A W 1 0 0 9 SH v4 0 0 0AL Mfg Date 20060926 HW Dev Serial LBNNIMJL44006J sysObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 72 1 sysUpT ime days 61 53 61 sysNtpT ime SNTP not synchronized sysServices 3 sysContact sysName sysLocation Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 196 System configuration using the CLI Setting boot parameters You can reboot the switch and configure BootP The topics covered in this section are boot command page 196 e ip bootp server command page 196 no ip bootp s
254. ission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties Nortel Networks software license agreement This Software License Agreement License Agreement is between you the end user Customer and Nortel Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates Nortel Networks PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the Software unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price Software is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates and is copyrighted and licensed not sold Software consists of machine readable instructions its components data audio visual content such as images text recordings or pictures and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies Nortel Networks grants you a lic
255. it Chassis dialog box PowerSupply tab 2 92 367 120 28 Chassis System Base Unt Info Agent SNMP Trap Receivers Powersupply Fan Banner Custom Banner ADAC ADAC MAC Ranges Stack Monitor a net ae roma snl bed a End The following table describes the PowerSupply tab fields Table 120 Power Supply tab fields Field Description Chassis The operational state of the power supply Possible values Primary include Power Supply other Some other state e notAvail State not available e removed Component was removed e disabled Operation disabled normal State is in normal operation e resetinProg There is a reset in progress e testing System is doing a self test warning System is operating at a warning level Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 268 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Field Description e nonFatalErr System is operating at error level fatalErr A fatal error stopped operation e notConfig A module needs to be configured The allowable values are determined by the component type Fan tab The Fan tab provides read only information about the operating status of the switch fans To open the Fan tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 From the shortcut
256. ith SNTP 277 The following table describes the SNTP dialog box fields Table 125 SNTP_Clock dialog box fields Field Description Primary The IP address of the primary SNTP server Server Address Secondary The IP address of the secondary SNTP server Server Address State Controls whether the device uses the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to synchronize the device s clock to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC If the value is disabled the device cannot synchronize its clock using SNTP If the value is unicast the device synchronizes shortly after boot time when network access becomes available and periodically thereafter Synclinterval Controls the frequency in hours that the device attempts to synchronize with the NTP servers ManualSync Specifies that the device to immediately attempt to synchronize Request with the NTP servers LastSync Specifies the Coordinated Universal Time UTC when the Time device last synchronized with an NTP server LastSync Specifies the IP source address of the NTP server with which Source this device last synchronized NextSync Specifies the the Coordinated Universal Time UTC at which Time the next synchronization is scheduled PrimaryServe Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize r Synch with the primary server address However synchronization with Failures the secondary server address may still occur Seconda Specifies the number of times the
257. jects such as buttons tabs and menu items braces Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option You must choose only one of the options Do not type the braces when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both brackets Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip interfaces alerts you can enter either show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces alerts italic text Indicates variables in command syntax descriptions Also indicates new terms and book titles Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid routes valid route is one variable and you substitute one value for it plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for text example prompts and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Related publications 19 separator gt Shows menu paths Example Protocols gt IP identifies the IP command on the Protocols menu vertical line Separates choices for command keywords an
258. k configuration loses power the temporary base unit cannot power up as the base unit when power is restored Also if the original unit rejoins the stack it cannot resume base unit status For this reason always assign the temporary base unit as the base unit until the failed unit is repaired or replaced ATTENTION If the temporary base unit is not assigned as the new base unit and the temporary base unit fails the next unit in the stack order becomes the temporary base unit This process continues after successive failures until only two units are left in the stack Redundant cascade stacking The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series allows a stack of up to 8 units into a dual path cascade stack If any single unit fails or if a cable is accidently disconnected other units in the stack remain operational without interruption In addition to increasing bandwidth the software uses the cables to provide two paths between units If one path breaks the data travels over the remaining path with half the normal inter switch bandwidth The following diagram shows an example of a stack configuration with a unit failure in the stack This illustrates e Unit 3 becomes non operational due to a unit failure cable disconnection or a loss of power e Units 2 and 4 directly upstream and downstream from Unit 3 sense the loss of link signals from unit 3 The software causes all the data to traverse the remaining path e The Cas
259. l button coca esa Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 106 Getting Started with Device Manager Step Action 1 Click Next to begin the installation process The License Agreement dialog box appears 2 Click accept the terms of the License Agreement License Agreement dialog box 2 Java Device Manager License Agreement Installation and Use of Java Device Manager Requires Acceptance This Software License Agreement License Agreement is between you the end user Customer and Nortel Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates Nortel PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT If you do not accept xl accept the terms of the Ucense Agreement 140 NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement E installing Install Complete 3 Click Next The Choose Install Set dialog box appears Choose Install Set dialog box W Java Device Manager Choose Install Sets Typical The JOM application and all on line help files v li be installed This option is recommended for most users Minimal Only the JOM application wall be installed This option
260. l Configuration command mode default rate limit command The default rate limit command restores the rate limiting value for the switch stack to the default setting The syntax for the default rate limit command is default rate limit The default rate limit command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA You can control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet Routing Switch as part of the auto negotiation process using the Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA feature When autonegotiation is disabled the hardware is configured for a single fixed speed and duplex value When auto negotiation is enabled the advertisement made by the switch is a constant value based upon all speed and duplex modes supported by the hardware When auto negotiating the switch selects the highest common operating mode supported between it and its link partner This section covers e show auto negotiation advertisements commana page 245 e show auto negotiation capabilities commana page 245 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA 245 e auto negotiation advertisements command page 246 e no auto negotiation advertisements command page 247 e default auto negotiation ad
261. lds Table 137 Organizational Defined Info tab fields Field Description TimeMark The TimeFilter for this entry LocalPortNum Identifies the local port on which the remote system information is received Index An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular MSAP An agent is encouraged to assign monotonically increasing index values to new entries starting with one after each reboot OrgDeflInfoOUl The Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI as defined in IEEE 802 2001 is a 24 bit three octets globally unique assigned number referenced by various standards of the information received from the remote system Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 301 Field Description OrgDeflnfoSubtype The integer value used to identify the subtype of the organizationally defined information received from the remote system The subtype value is required to identify different instances of organizationally defined information that cannot be retrieved without a unique identifier that indicates the particular type of information contained in the information string OrgDeflnfolndex This object represents an arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular unrecognized organizationally defined informat
262. le Detecting 5 16 Low 9 Enable Detecting 5 16 Low a Cq Q uit space return Continue show poe power measurement command The show poe power measurement command displays the voltage current and power values for each powered device connected to each port The syntax for the show poe power measurement command is show poe power measurement port lt portlist gt The show poe power measurement command is executed in the User Exec command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring PoE using web based management 167 I ___ LLL ee Table 41 show poe power measurement command parameters and variables page 167 shows the variables and parameters for the show poe power measurement command Table 41 show poe power measurement command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Description port lt portlist gt Enter the ports for which you want to display the power measurements ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system displays all ports Figure 55 show poe power measurement command output page 167 displays sample output from the show poe power measurement command Figure 55 show poe power measurement command output 255 T PUR show poe power measurement Port Volt lt U gt Current lt mA gt PowerCWatt gt A 6 8 4 008
263. le and multiple objects page 137 and to the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 This section describes the types of statistics and graphs available the graph dialog boxes and the procedure for creating a graph Types of statistics The data tables in the statistics dialog boxes list the counters or categories of statistics being gathered for the specified object For example the categories for ports include Interface Ethernet Errors Bridge and Rmon Each category can be associated with six types of statistics Table 27 Types of statistics page 134 describes the types of statistics that are available Table 27 Types of statistics Statistic Description AbsoluteValue The total count since the last time counters were reset A system reboot resets all counters Cumulative The total count since the statistics window was first opened The elapsed time for the cumulative counter is displayed at the bottom of the graph window Average The cumulative count divided by the cumulative elapsed time Minimum The minimum average for the counter for a given polling interval over the cumulative elapsed time Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Working with statistics and graphs 135 Statistic Description O O Maximum
264. leSystem dialog box appears with the Config Image Diag tab displayed 2 Click the Save Configuration tab The Save Configuration tab appears Figure 96 Save Config tab 192 167 120 28 FileSystem Config Image Diaa file Ascii Config File License File Save Configuration IV AutosaveToNvramEnabled Action copyConfigToNvram Status other Refresh Close Hep The following table describes the Save Configuration tab fields Table 124 Save Configuration tab fields Field Description S O AutoSavetoNvramEnabled Enables or disables autosave on the switch Action Select the copyConfigToNvram option to save the switch configuration to NVRAM and click Apply Status This field displays the status of the copyConfigToNvram action Possible values are e other no action has been taken since switch boot e inProgress the operation is in progress e success the operation succeeded e fail the operation failed End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 276 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Working with SNTP The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP feature synchronizes the Universal Coordinated Time UTC to an accuracy within 1 second This feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 MIB is the sSagent With this feature the system c
265. led units The non pre enabled units in a stack must meet the following requirements before they are added into a stack configuration e contain a valid license file a license file contains the switch MAC addresses e Operational mode of rear ports operating in Stacking Mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 40 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Stacking functionality delivery The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches allow you to stack multiple switches together to create a single virtual switch that can be managed as a single device Stacking functionality is delivered in two distinctively different ways on Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches e Through stack enabled units with order codes AL2515xxx E6 The rear ports of stack enabled ERS 2500 switch are factory pre enabled configured and operating in Stacking Mode by default and are ready to stack These units do not require or use the software licensing mechanism e Through software using a licensing mechanism for standalone units with order codes AL2500xxx E6 Standalone ERS 2500 switches require the purchase of a Stacking License Kit for each license to create a license file which unlocks stacking capability on standalone units Stack enabled switches The stack enabled unit rear ports are configu
266. lfbe6a md5_file 60cf72ae 8dbdcOc2 346a5b0d 346a5b0d time_base 2007 11 14 09 45 01 time_modify 2007 11 14 09 45 01 time_expiration num_unique_ids 1 flags 0x00000022 SITE MEMO memo Stacking License 2526TH clear license command The clear license command deletes the existing licenses on your switch The syntax for the clear license command is clear license lt 1 10 gt all The clear license command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Copying the license file using the Java Device Manager Use the Java Device Manager to copy the license file to the 2500 Series Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stacking functionality delivery 43 Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select Edit gt File System The FileSystem dialog box appears 2 Click the License File tab The License File tab appears 192 167 120 28 FileSystem LoadServerAddr 192 167 120 13 LicenseFilename mylicense dat LicenseFileAction C LicenseFileStatus other Apply Refresh Chose Help 3 In the LoadServerAddr field enter the TFTP server address 4 In the LicenseFileName field enter the software license filename on the TFTP server ATTENTION The LicenseFileName field is case sensitive and you can use
267. lick Enabled to enable daylight savings time 7 Click Apply End Displaying topology information using Device Manager This section describes diagnostic information available in Device Manager on the following tabs Topology tab page 279 Topology Table tab page 280 Topology tab To view topology information use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 280 Configuring the switch using Device Manager From the Device Manager menu bar select Edit gt Diagnostics gt Topology The Toplogy dialog box appears with the Topology tab displayed Figure 98 ee dialog box Topology tab x aaa 192 167 120 28 Status topOn C topOff NmenistChg 1 day 04h 08m 21s NmmMaxNum 100 NmmCurNum 2 Pajeroa oef ree Table 126 Topology tab fields page 280 describes the Topology tab fields Table 126 Topology tab fields Field Description IpAddr The IP address of the device Status Whether Nortel topology is on topOn or off topOff for the device The default value is topOn NmmLstChg The value of sysUpTime the last time an entry in the network management MIB NMM topology table was added deleted or modified If the table has not changed since the last cold or warm start of the agent NmmMaxNum The maximum number of entries in the NMM to
268. llation destin es a un technicien qualifi CAUTION Attenzione Leggere attentamente Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione verificarne il collegamento con la presa appropriata nonch la certificazione per luso nell impianto elettrico posseduto Non utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato dall ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di servizio consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto CAUTION Advertencia S rvase leer inmediatamente Inspeccione este cable de alimentaci n el ctrica y determine si viene con el enchufe apropiado y est debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema el ctrico Si no cumple con los reglamentos del sistema el ctrico de su pa s desp jese de este cable de alimentaci n inmediatamente y obtenga el cable requerido seg n las ordenanzas y c digos el ctricos nacionales Refi rase a la documentaci n t cnica de este producto para recibir informaci n detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones deber seguir Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 S
269. longing to MLTs Neither web based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown warning messages Table 14 shutdown command parameters and variables page 95 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown command Table 14 shutdown command parameters and variables Parameters and variables Description cancel Aborts all scheduled switch shutdowns Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 96 CLI Basics Parameters Description and variables P force Instructs the switch to skip the shutdown confirmation prompt minutes to wait Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the lt 1 80 gt switch resets itself The default wait time is set at 10 minutes ATTENTION Any configurations or login performed on the switch after the shutdown command is initiated are not saved to NVRAM and are lost after the reset The shutdown command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Managing basic system information This section shows you how to view basic system information such as the current software version This section contains information about the following topics e show sys info command page 96 e show tech command page 97 show sys info command The show sys info command displays the current system characteristics The syntax for t
270. lue used to identify the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with the management address advertised by the local system agent Identifies the ports on which the local system management address TLVs are transmitted in the LLPDUs Neighbor tab End With the Neighbor tab you can view LLDP properties for the remote system Use the following procedure to open the Neighbor tab Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 296 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the Neighbor tab The Neighbor tab appears Figure 107 Neighbor tab x Gcbals Port TX Stats RX Stats Local System Local Port Local Management KERES Neighbor Mgmt Address Unknown TLY Organizational Defined Info TeseMark Locabrtthum index ChessitdSubtype Chassstd SystapSupparted SysCapEnabled Systlame Sysbesc Portidsubtype Portid Portbesc a W e Grows The following table describes the Neighbor tab fields Neighbor tab fields Field Description TimeMark The TimeFilter for this entry See the TimeFilter textual convention in IETF RFC 2021 for details about
271. main feature of the AUR is the ability to retain the configuration CFG image of a unit in a stack during a unit replacement The retained CFG image from the old unit is restored to the new unit Because retained CFG images are kept in the DRAM of the stack the stack power must be kept on during the procedure ATTENTION In order for AUR to function properly the new unit and the existing units in the stack must all be running the same version of software Release 4 1 software or later Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Auto Unit Replacement 55 ATTENTION AUR is intended for a stack configuration of two or more units In a two unit stack configuration if a unit fails the remaining unit becomes a standalone switch AUR loads the configuration of the failed unit in the replacement of ERS 2500 Series unit if the failed unit was a non Base Unit AUR is not designed for the situation of removing and reinserting the same switch with the same MAC address Other information related to this feature e The new unit must be the same hardware configuration as the old including the same number of ports e If the administrator adds a new unit with a different hardware configuration the configuration of this unit is used e If the administrator adds a new unit with the same hardware con
272. mand has no parameters or variables Figure 26 show tech command output page 97 displays a sample output from the show tech command Figure 26 show tech command output 2526T lt config gt show tech weeeeS YS Inf om System Information Operation Mode Switch MAC Address 6 19 69 AF C8 88 Reset Count 31 Last Reset Type Software Download Autotopology Enabled sysObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 72 1 sysUpTime days 61 59 37 sysNt pT ime SNIP not synchronized sysServices 3 sysContact sysName sysLocation Unit 1 Switch Model 2526T MDA Model None Hardware Version GA Firmware Version 1 6 6 9 Software Version v4 6 6 661 Serial Number LBNNTMJL44000J Manufacturing Date 20060926 More q Quit space return Continue m Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 98 CLI Basics Managing MAC address forwarding database table This section describes the commands to view the contents of the MAC address forwarding database table as well as setting the age out time for the addresses The following topics are covered e show mac address table command page 98 e mac address table aging time command page 99 e default mac address table aging time command page 99 show mac address table command The show mac address table command displays the current contents
273. mand output 2526T gt show lldp 8 2 1ab configuration TxInterval 3 TxHoldMultiplier 4 ReInitDelay 2 TxDelay 2 NotificationInterval 5 2526T gt show lldp neighbor mgmt addr 2526T gt ATTENTION To display the neighbor management addresses using the show 1lldp port neighbor mgmt addr command you must configure the connected port of the neighbor to transmit local management address TLVs lldp tx tlv port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr Figure 83 show Ildp port rx stats command output page 228 displays the output from the show Ildp rx stats command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 228 System configuration using the CLI Figure 83 show Ildp port rx stats command output 526T gt show lldp rx stats lldp rx stats ort Frames Frames Frames TLUs TLWs AgeOuts jum Discarded Errors Total Discarded Unrecognized A a a 6 6 6 a a a 6 6 a a a z 6 6 a a a 6 6 6 a a 4 6 6 6 a a 4 6 6 6 4 a a a 6 6 a 4 a 6 6 6 a a a a 6 6 a 6 a a 6 8 6 6 1 a a a 6 a a 2 a a 8 8 6 a 3 a a a 8 z a 14 a a 5 8 1 a 15 a a a 8 17 a More q Quit space return Cont inue gt Figure 84 show Ildp port tx stats command output page 228 displays the output from the show Ildp tx stats command Figure 84 show Ildp port tx stats command output 2
274. mand parameter completion Ctrl K and Ctrl R Redisplay line Ctrl N or Down arrow Next history command Redisplay line o Next history command o Ctrl P or Up arrow Previous history command Ctrl U Delete entire line Ctrl z Exit Global Configuration mode to Privileged EXEC mode Esc C and Esc U Capitalize character at cursor Esc D Delete 1 word to the right Esc F Move 1 word forward help command The help command is in all command modes and displays a brief message about using the CLI help system The syntax for the help command is help The help command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The help command has no parameters or variables Figure 24 help command output page 90 shows the output from the help command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 90 CLI Basics Figure 24 help command output 2526T gt help Context help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark If nothing matches the help list will be empty and you must backup until entering a shows the available options Two styles of help are provided 1 Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument e g show gt and describes each possible argument 2 Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered
275. mber 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 198 System configuration using the CLI e copy config tftp command page 199 e copy tftp config command page 200 show tftp server command The show tftp server command displays the IP address of the server used for all TF TP related transfers The syntax for the show tftp server command is show tftp server The show tftp server command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show tftp server command has no parameters or variables Figure 66 show tftp server command output page 198 shows a sample output of the show tftp server command Figure 66 show tftp server command output 255 T PWR show tftp server TFTP Server IP address 192 167 126 13 255 T PWRH tftp server command The tftp server command assigns the address for the switch to use for TFTP services The syntax of the tftp server command is tftp server lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt The tftp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 62 tftp server command parameters and variables page 198 describes the parameters and variables for the tftp server command Table 62 tftp server command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables P XXX XXX XXX XXX Enter the dotted decimal IP address of the server you want to use for TFTP services Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 3231
276. me pages include a button that opens another page or updates the values shown on the current page Some pages include icons that initiate an action such as reformatting the current displayed data as a bar or pie chart Table 32 Page icons page 151 describes the icons that you use to modify information in a statistical table Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing stack information 151 Table 32 Page icons Icon Name Description A Modify Accesses a modification page for the selected row pl View Accesses a view only statistics page for the selected row xX Delete Deletes a row g Help Accesses the Help menu in a new Web browser ATTENTION Text within a table that is underlined and highlighted in blue and is a hyperlink to a related management page Viewing stack information ATTENTION The Embedded Web Server automatically detects the operational mode of your system If the system is in stand alone mode the Stack Information page option is not listed in the menu To view stack information Step Action 1 Open the Stack Information screen by selecting Summary gt Stack Information from the menu This screen is illustrated in Figure 49 Stack Information page page 152 End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview
277. me read and write permission to enabled before you can save the configuration parameters Although most configuration parameters are saved to the configuration file certain parameters are not saved see Table 8 Parameters not saved to the configuration file page 73 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 74 System configuration software features ASCII configuration file You can also store the configuration parameters of a switch stack as an ASCII configuration file and retrieve the stored file to automatically configure a replacement switch stack Autotopology You can enable the Optivity Autotopology protocol on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series using the CLI For more information about Autotopology go to the Nortel support site www nortel com support The product family for Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802 1ab Release 4 1 software supports the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP IEEE 802 1ab which lets stations connected to a LAN to advertise their capabilities to each other enabling the discovery of physical topology information for network management LLDP compatible stations can consist of any interconnection device including PCs IP Phones switches and routers Each LLDP station stores LLDP information in a standard Manag
278. ments command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 107 no auto negotiation advertisements command page 247 describes the parameters and variables for the no auto negotiation advertisements command Table 107 no auto negotiation advertisements command Parameters and values Description port lt portlist gt Enter ports for which you want to clear all advertisements default auto negotiation advertisements command The default auto negotiation advertisements command sets default advertisements for the switch The syntax for the default auto negotiation advertisements command is default auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt The default auto negotiation advertisements command is executed in the interface configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 248 Ethernet port management using the CLI Table 108 default auto negotiation advertisements command page 248 describes the parameters and variables for the default auto negotiation advertisements command Table 108 default auto negotiation advertisements command Parameters and values Description port lt portlist gt Enter ports for which you want to set default advertisements This feature lets you customize the capabilities that you advertise It also lets you c
279. mert neighbor Neighbor Mgmt Address Unknown TLY Organizational Defined Info ajre The following table describes the Local Management tab fields Table 134 Local Management tab fields Field Desoripton AddrSubtype The type of management address identifier encoding used in the associated Addr object Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 295 Description The string value used to identify the management address component associated with the local system This address is used to contact the management entity AddrLen AddrlfSubtype Adadrlfld AddrOID AddrPortsTxEnable The total length of the management address subtype and the management address fields in LLDPDUs transmitted by the local LLDP agent The management address length field is needed so that the receiving systems that do not implement SNMP are not required to implement an iana family numbers address length equivalency table to decode the management address Identifies the numbering method used to define the interface number associated with the remote system e unknown e iflndex e systemPortNumber The integer value used to identify the interface number of the management address component associated with the local system The va
280. mit tab 192 167 120 28 Unit 1 Rear Ports Mode wedRatePps Enable multicast Ojtrue eee O true Refresh il Close Help Rate Limiting Feature is disabled when AllowedRatePps 0 Can not disable Enable false both multicast amp broadcast entries 2 rows End The following table describes the Rate Limit tab fields Table 110 Rate Limit tab fields Field Description Traffic Type Specifies the traffic type AllowedRatePps Allowed traffic rate packets second It is in the range of 0 262143 0 3FFFFh ATTENTION Rate Limiting feature is disabled when AllowedRatePps equals to 0 Enable When Enable is set to True the TrafficType can either be multicast broadcast or both ATTENTION You cannot set the Enabled field for both multicast and broadcast TrafficeType to False at the same time This is illegal configuration Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 252 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Rear Ports Mode tab Use the JDM to configure the operational mode of the rear ports into standalone or Stacking Mode in the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Step Action 1 From the JDM menu select Edit gt Unit The Unit dialog box opens with the Unit tab displayed 2 Click the Rear
281. mmand copies the current configuration to NVRAM The syntax for the copy config nvram command is copy config nvram The copy config nvram command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The copy config nvram command has no parameters or variables ATTENTION The system automatically issues the copy config nvram command periodically See Enabling and disabling autosave page 206 for details write memory command The write memory command copies the current configuration to NVRAM The syntax for the write memory command is write memory Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 206 System configuration using the CLI The write memory command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The write memory command has no parameters or variables save config command The save config command copies the current configuration to NVRAM The syntax for the save config command is save config The save config command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The save config command has no parameters or variables Enabling and disabling autosave The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series performs a check every 60 seconds to detect changes in the configuration file or a new log message in the nonvolatile storage If any of these two events occurs the switch automatically saves it
282. mmand is copy running config tftp lt address gt lt filename gt This command can be executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 57 copy running config tftp command parameters and variables page 192 describes the parameters and variables of this command Table 57 copy running config tftp command parameters and variables Signifies the IP address of the TFTP server filename Denotes the filename to store configuration commands on the TFTP server ATTENTION Use the copy running config tftp command only from the base unit in a stack Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Customizing your system 193 Customizing your system You can customize your system using the CLI commands described in this section This section covers the following topics Setting the terminal page 193 e Displaying system information page 195 Setting boot parameters page 196 Setting TFTP parameters page 197 e Customizing the opening banner page 200 Setting the terminal You can view the terminal settings set them to default settings or customize the terminal settings This sections contains information about the following commands e show terminal command page 193 e terminal command page 193 show terminal command The show terminal command displays the
283. n config if 10194EA You can see a specific value for each command mode at the prompt line and you can use specific commands to enter or exit each command mode Table 9 Command mode prompts and entrance exit commands page 83 Additionally you can only enter command modes from specific modes and only exit to specific command modes Table 9 Command mode prompts and entrance exit commands page 83 describes the command mode prompts and entrance exit commands Table 9 Command mode prompts and entrance exit commands Sample Prompt for ae the Ethernet Enter exit command Switch 2500 User EXEC 2500T gt Default mode automatically exec enter logout or exit to quit to Main Menu Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 84 CLI Basics Command Sample Prompt for mode the Ethernet Enter exit command Switch 2500 Privileged EXEC 2500T enable to enter from User privExec EXEC mode logout or exit to quit to Main Menu Global 2500T config configure to enter from Configuration Privileged EXEC mode config end or exit to exit to Privileged EXEC mode logout to quit to Main Menu Interface 2500T config if interface FastEthern Configuration et lt portnum gt all1 config if to enter from Global Configuration mode logout to quit to Main Menu end to exit to P
284. n Status Passed 255 T PWRH ASCII Configuration Generator The primary goal of the ASCII Configuration Generator ACG is to provide the users of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series with a tool that lets them easily modify configuration of a particular switch or stack ACG generates an ASCII configuration file which reproduces the behavior of the current binary configuration file The user can also rely on this function to maintain backup configurations as well as use it as a reliable method for debugging the current configuration of a switch ATTENTION When you are connected to a stack form the console port ensure that the console is on the base unit before downloading an ASCII file The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series can download an editable ASCII configuration file from the TFTP server You can load the ASCII configuration file automatically at boot time or on demand using console menus or CLI Once downloaded the configuration file automatically configures the switch according to the Command Line Interface CLI commands in the file The maximum size for an ASCII configuration file is 100 KBs larger configuration files must be split into multiple files For more information on loading the ASCII configuration file automatically see Automatically loading Configuration file page 188 The commands that are associated with ACG are e show running config command page 191 e copy running config tftp command page
285. n stack MAC Address 2 CFG 2 Image DRAM CFG1 Mirror Image CFG 4 Mirror Image Unit 3 NBU in stack MAC Address 3 CFG 3 Image Removing a BU When a BU is removed the TEMP BU assumes the role of the BU Because all the CFG mirror images of the NBUs reside in the removed BU the TEMP BU mirrors all the CFG image of the NBUs in the stack After the removal of the BU from the stack shown in Figure 16 CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 4 page 57 the TEMP BU unit 2 has to mirror all the CFG images in the stack see Figure 18 CFG mirror images in the stack after removing the BU unit 1 page 59 The feature also ensures that the stack always has two copies of an INACTIVE CFG mirror image Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Auto Unit Replacement 59 Figure 18 CFG mirror images in the stack after removing the BU unit 1 Unit 2 TEMP BU Unit 3 NBU in stack Unit 4 NBU in stack in stack MAC Address 3 MAC Address 4 MAC Address 2 CFG 2 CFG3 CFG 4 Image Image Image DRAM DRAM INACTIVE CFG 2 CFG 1 Mirror Image Mirror Image os FG 3 FG CEG CFG 1 Mirror Image Mirror Image CFG 4 Mirror Image As shown in Figure 18 CFG mirror images in the stack after removing the BU unit 1 page 59 e Unit 2 becomes the TEMP BU e The CFG 1
286. nd 242 Enabling rate limiting 242 show rate limit command 243 rate limit command 243 no rate limit command 244 default rate limit command 244 Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA 244 show auto negotiation advertisements command 245 show auto negotiation capabilities command 245 auto negotiation advertisements command 246 no auto negotiation advertisements command 247 default auto negotiation advertisements command 247 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 249 Viewing Unit information 249 Unit tab 250 Rate Limit tab 250 Viewing switch IP information 253 Globals tab 253 Addresses tab 254 ARP tab 255 TCP tab 256 TCP Connections tab 257 UDP Listeners tab 257 Editing the chassis configuration 258 System tab 259 Agent tab 265 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 12 Contents PowerSupply tab 267 Fan tab 268 Banner tab 269 Custom Banner tab 271 Working with configuration files 272 FileSystem dialog box 272 ASCII config file 273 Save Configuration tab 274 Working with SNTP 276 Configuring SNTP 276 Configuring local time zone using the device manager 278 Configuring daylight savings time using the device manager 278 Displaying topology information using Device Manager 279 Topology tab 279 Topology Table tab 280 Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 281 LLDP Globals tab 282
287. nd builds a network topology map LLDP operational modes LLDP is a one way protocol An LLDP agent can transmit information about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with its MAC service access point MSAP identifier The LLDP agent can also receive information about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with a remote MSAP identifier However LLDP agents cannot solicit information from each other You can set the local LLDP agent to transmit only receive only or to both transmit and receive LLDP information You can configure the state for LLDP reception and transmission using SNMP or CLI commands Connectivity and management information The information fields in each LLDP frame are contained in a Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Unit LLDPDU as a sequence of short variable length information elements known as type length value TLV Each LLDPDU includes the following four mandatory TLVs e chassis ID TLV Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 76 System configuration software features e port ID TLV Time to Live TLV e End Of LLDPDU TLV The chassis ID and the port ID values are concatenated to form a logical MSAP identifier that is used by the recipient to identify the sending LLDP agent and port A non zero value in the Time to Live
288. nd certified stack cables for such configurations are solely the user s responsibility should any stack operation issues occur The following illustration demonstrates the proper stack cable crossover configuration Failure to use this configuration can result in loss of connectivity This example shows a cascade down configuration Connecting stack cables Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stack configuration 49 1 Base Unit 2 Cascade Cable 3 Cascade Cable used for return Initial stack installation During the initial installation of the stack the software automatically determines the physical order of all units in the stack according to the position of the base unit within the stack Thereafter the individual units maintain their original unit numbering even if the position of one or more units in the stack is changed For example when the stack is initially powered the base unit becomes unit 1 and the unit that the base unit connects to via the Cascade Down cable becomes unit 2 and the next unit is unit 3 and so on until the maximum stack configuration up to 8 units is reached If the base unit is changed to another unit in the stack the new base unit keeps its original unit number in the stack Stack MAC address When a switch partici
289. ndix D Command List nn Tr renner Command Page No snmp server host lt host ip gt port lt 1 65535 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management lt community string gt v2c lt community string gt ANNAA N08 v3 auth no auth auth priv lt username gt snmp server location lt text gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 snmp server name lt text gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 snmp server user engine id lt engineid gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt username gt read view lt view name gt Security Configuration and Management write view lt view name gt notify view NN47215 505 lt view name gt md5 sha lt password gt read view lt view name gt write view lt view name gt notify view lt view name gt 8des aes des lt password gt read view lt view name gt write view lt view name gt notify view lt view name gt snmp server view lt view name gt lt OID gt lt OID gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt OID gt lt OID gt lt OID gt lt OID gt lt OID gt lt OID gt Security Configuration and Management lt OID gt lt OID gt NN47215 505 snmp trap link status port lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Con
290. nfiguration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Setting local time zone 213 e no clock summer time page 214 e show clock time zone page 214 e show clock summer time page 215 clock time zone The clock time zone command sets the local time zone relative to Universal Coordinated Time UTC The syntax for the clock time zone command is clock time zone lt zone gt lt hours gt lt minutes gt The clock time zone command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 74 clock time zone command parameters and variables page 213 describes the parameters and variables for the clock time zone command Table 74 clock time zone command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p zone Time zone acronym that can be displayed when showing system time Range Up to 4 characters hours Hours difference from UTC Valid Range 12 to 12 minutes Optional minutes difference from UTC Range 0 59 no clock time zone The no clock time zone command disables the clock time zone feature The syntax for the no clock time zone command is no clock time zone The no clock time zone command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no clock time zone command has no parameters or variables clock summer time The clock summer time command sets the daylight savings time with start and end dates The syntax fo
291. nfiguration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 no name command page 236 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 no rate limit command page 244 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 no shutdown port lt portlist gt no shutdown command page 234 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 362 Appendix D Command List Command no snmp server authentication trap community ro rw lt community string gt contact host lt host
292. nication speed You can view the current console communication port settings and configure the Console port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal To view current console communication port settings and configure Console port speed use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Console Comm Port The Console Communication Port page appears Figure 125 Console Communication Port page Configuration gt Console Communication Port Communication Port Setting Comm Port Data Bits 8 Data Bits Comm Port Parity No Parity Comm Port Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit Console Port Speed 3600 The following table describes the items on the Console Commu nication Port page Table 151 Console Communication Port page items mem renge oesoripion O O Comm Port Data Bits ne The current console communication port data bit setting Comm Port Parity Po The current console communication port parity setting Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring Rate Limiting 335 Item Description Comm Port Stop Bits The current console communication port stop bit setting Console port Speed Choose the Console port speed baud rate ATTENTION The default setting is 9600 CAUTION If you choose a baud rate that does not matc
293. no 1ldp tx tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs The syntax for the lldp tx tlv command is no lldp tx tlv port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr port desc sys cap sys desc sys name The no 1ldp tx tlv command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 82 no Ildp tx tlv command parameters and variables page 221 describes the parameters and variables for the no Ildp tx tlv command Table 82 no Ildp tx tlv command parameters and variables Parameters and i Description variables p port lt portlist gt Specifies the ports affected by the command local mgmt addr Local management address TLV Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 222 System configuration using the CLI Parameters and vee Description variables port desc Port description TLV sys cap System capabilities TLV sys desc System description TLV sys name System name TLV default Ildp tx tlv command The default 1lldp tx tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs by default the optional TLVs are not included in LLDPDUs The syntax for the default lldp tx tlv command is default lldp tx tlv port lt portlist gt port desc sys cap sys desc Local mgmt addr sys name
294. ns as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written perm
295. nsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from Customer s use of the Software Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations Neither party may bring an action regardless of form more than two years after the cause of the action arose The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software If the Software is acquired in the United States then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York Contents New in this release 15 Features 15 Other changes 15 Introduction 17 Before you begin 17 Text conventions 17 Related publications 19 How to get help 20 Getting help from the Nortel web site 20 Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 20 Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center 20 Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 20 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware 23 Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 23 Front panel 23 Back panel 29 Network configuration examples 34 Small office desktop switch application 34 Branch office workgroup switch application 35 Medium sized office wiring closet switch application 36 Nortel Ethernet Routing
296. nterface associated with the node the value 0 0 0 0 is used LocalPort The local port number for this TCP connection RemAddress The remote IP address for this TCP connection RemPort The remote port number for this TCP connection State The state of this TCP connection End UDP Listeners tab The UDP Listeners tab displays information on the UDP listeners currently maintained by the switch To open the UDP Listeners tab use the following procedure LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 258 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt IP The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the UDP Listeners tab The UDP Listeners tab appears x EZE 2 row s The following table describes the UDP Listeners tab fields Table 116 UDP Listeners tab fields Field Description LocalAddress The local IP address for this UDP listener In the case of a UDP listener that accepts datagrams for any IP interface associated with the node the value 0 0 0 0 is used LocalPort The local port number for this UDP listener End Editing the chassis configuration You can edit a chassis configuration from the Edit Chassis dialog box To open the Chassis dialog bo
297. nun nun nun NUNHRNNNNUN Bene nnn nan nnnnnERNHNH HHN nun nun HRRHRRHHRHN BERRA Enter Ctrl Y to begin D DAD PA D E DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE EME DE PE DE DE DE DE DE DE MED E DE DE DE DE DE DE DEDE DE ME DE DE PE PE DE DE DE DE DE M E DE E DE DE E DE DEDE DE ME DE DE MEE IE Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 58T_PWR nn Nortel Satake ee Copyright lt c 1996 2086 All Rights Reserved mere see we xx HW BA FW 1 0 0 5 SW v4 6 6 8 set 2 Press Ctrl Y and the CLI prompt appears 2500 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Basic navigation 87 The gt sign at the end of the name of the switch indicates that the default CLI mode is User EXEC mode See CLI command modes page 82 to select the command mode you want to use and are authorized to use End Setting the system username and password You can set usernames and passwords for system access through the CLI Telnet and web based management For the standard software image the default password for user RO is user and for user RW is secure For the secure software image the default password for RO is userpasswa and for RW is securepasswa For more information see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Getting help When you navigate through the CLI onl
298. o clock time zone 213 clock summer time 213 no clock summer time 214 show clock time zone 214 show clock summer time 215 Enabling Autopology 215 autotopology command 216 no autotopology command 216 default autotopology command 216 show autotopology settings 216 show autotopology nmm table 217 Configuring LLDP using the CLI 217 lldp command 218 default Ildop command 219 lldp config notification command 219 no Ildp config notification command 220 default Ildp config notification command 220 lldp tx tlV command 221 no Ildp tx tlV command 221 default Ildp tx tlv command 222 lldp status command 222 no Ildp status command 223 default Ildp status command 223 show Ildp command 224 show lldp port command 226 Configuring LEDs to blink on the display panel 229 Upgrading software 229 download command 230 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Contents 11 Ethernet port management using the CLI 233 Enabling or disabling a port 233 shutdown command for the port 233 no shutdown command 234 Naming ports 235 name command 235 no name command 236 default name command 236 Setting port speed 237 speed command 237 default speed command 238 duplex command 239 default duplex command 239 Enabling flow control 240 flowcontrol command 240 no flowcontrol command 241 default flowcontrol comma
299. ocal port on which the remote system information is received Index An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular MSAP An agent is encouraged to assign monotonically increasing index values to new entries starting with one after each reboot UnknownTLVType The value extracted from the type field of the unknown TLV UnknownTLVInfo The value extracted from the value field of the unknown TLV End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 300 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Organizational Defined Info tab With the Organizational Defined Info tab you can view organizationally specific properties for the remote system Use the following procedure to open the Organizational Defined Info tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Click the Organizational Defined Info tab The Organizational Defined Info tab appears Figure 109 erdenicauone Defined Info tab Gobas Port Son paren pe Croarizationas Defined fo J TeseMark Locabortivum index Grgbefinfoout OrgbeFinfoSubtype OrgbeFinfaindex Grgbefinfo ta a a The following table describes the Organizational Defined Info tab fie
300. of the MAC address forwarding database table The syntax for the show mac address table command is show mac address table vid lt 1 4094 gt aging time port lt LINE gt address lt H H H gt include exclude lt pattern gt The show mac address table command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 15 show mac address table command parameters and variables page 98 describes the parameters and variables for the show mac address table command Table 15 show mac address table command parameters and variables Parameters Description and variables P vid lt 1 4094 gt Enter the number of the VLAN you want to display the forwarding database Default is to display the management VLAN s database aging time Displays the time in seconds after which an unused entry is removed from the forwarding database port lt LINE gt List of ports address lt H H H gt Displays a specific MAC address if it exists in the database Enter the MAC address you want displayed include exclude Lets you filter the results of the command by printing lt pattern gt only those entries in the address table that include or exclude a given pattern The value for lt pattern gt must be a sequence of 1 to 6 bytes in hex separated by dashes for example show mac address table port 1 1 5 address include 00 0E 45 23 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162
301. of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP is deleted from tables contained in lldoRemoteSystemsData and IldpExtensions objects because the information timeliness interval has expired This counter is similar to l dpStatsRemTablesAgeouts except that it is on a per port basis This enables NMS to poll tables associated with the lidpRemoteSystemsData objects and all LLDP extension objects associated with remote systems on the indicated port only This counter is set to zero during agent initialization When the admin status for a port changes from disabled to rxOnly txOnly or txAndRx the counter associated with the same port is reset to 0 The agent also flushes all remote system information associated with the same port This counter is incremented only once when the complete set of information is invalidated aged out from all related tables on a particular port Partial aging is not allowed and thus does not change the value of this counter Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 291 End Graphing LLDP receive statistics Use the following procedure to graph LLDP receive statistics Step Action 1 From the RX Stats tab select the port for which you want to display statistics 2 Click Graph The RX Stats
302. old value if the traffic ingressing on the port exceeds the threshold The hardware restrictions on this platform do not allow you to determine if the traffic from a port is the cause of excess broadcast or multicast traffic Consequently you cannot perform port specific actions such as disabling a port You can generate a trap to detect the excess traffic or you can configure the switch to store a message in the system log when the traffic on the port exceeds the threshold value This message in the system log conveys that some traffic to the switch is dropped When the volume of either packet type is high placing severe strain on the network often referred to as a storm you can set the forwarding rate of those packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total available bandwidth The pps Packets Per Second value you set is a small amount of the maximum value of pps for the maximum available bandwidth that is 262148 pps ATTENTION All Rate Limiting configuration settings are applied across the entire unit You cannot set some ports in the unit to limit broadcast traffic with a value of X pps and some other ports in the same to limit multicast traffic with a value of Y pps Other features RFCs For more information about networking concepts protocols and topologies consult the following RFCs e REC 1213 MIB I Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 0
303. ommana page 223 no Ildp tx tlv commana page 221 no logging no logging remote address no logging remote enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 361 Command no logging remote level no mac security no mac security mac address table address lt H H H gt port lt portlist gt security list lt 1 32 gt no mac security security list lt 1 32 gt no mlt lt id gt no name port lt portlist gt no password security no port mirroring no radius server host key password fallback secondary host no rate limit no rmon alarm lt 1 65535 gt no rmon event lt 1 65535 gt no rmon history lt 1 65535 gt no rmon stats lt 1 65535 gt Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Co
304. ommand page 202 no clock summer time no clock time zone no command no clock summer time page 214 no clock time zone page 213 no command page 90 no eapol guest vlan enable no flowcontrol port lt portlist gt no ip address no ip bootp server Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 no autotopology command page 216 no ip address command page 179 no ip bootp server command page 197 no ip default gateway no ip domain name no ip name server lt A B C D gt no ip netmask no ipmgr source ip lt 1 10 gt no ipmgr telnet snmp web no lacp aggregation port lt portlist gt enable no Ildp port lt portlist gt config notification no Ildp port lt portlist gt status no Ildp tx tlv port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr port desc sys cap sys desc sys name no ip default gateway command page 180 no ip domain name commana page 188 no ip name server command page 187 no ip netmask command page 179 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 no Ildp config notification command page 220 no Ildp status c
305. ommand page 237 e default speed commana page 238 e duplex commana page 239 Enabling or disabling a port page 233 speed command The speed command sets the speed of the port The syntax for the speed command is speed port lt portlist gt 10 100 1000 auto The speed command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 96 speed command parameters and variables page 237 describes the parameters and variables for the speed command Table 96 speed command parameters and variables Parameters and ar Description variables port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to configure the speed Enter the port numbers you want to configure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 238 Ethernet port management using the CLI Parameters and variables Description ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command 10 100 1000 auto Sets speed to 10 10 Mb s 100 100 Mb s 1000 1000 Mb s or 1 GB s auto autonegotiation ATTENTION When you set the port speed for autonegotiation ensure that the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation default speed command The default speed command sets the speed of the port to the factory default speed The syntax for
306. ommand is show autotopology nmm table The show autotopology nmm table command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode The show autotopology nmm table command has no parameters or variables Figure 77 show autotopology nmm table command output page 217 displays a sample output of the show autotopology nmm table command Figure 77 show autotopology nmm table command output trac cont ig fshoy autotopology nmm table LS L LPort IP Addr Seg ID MAC Addr Chassis Type 07 192 167 126 28 G6xG60006 B61969AFC8H1 2526T 12 Yes HTBT 1 24 192 167 120 8 6x 66169 GGGECH831620 Passport 1648 12 Yes HTBT 2526T lt conf ig gt t_ Configuring LLDP using the CLI You can enable the LLDP using the CLI For more information about LLDP see Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802 1ab page 74 This section covers the following commands Ildp commana page 218 e default Ildp command page 219 e Ildp config notification command page 219 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 218 System configuration using the CLI e no Ildp config notification command page 220 e default Ildp config notification command page 220 e Ildp tx tlv command page 221 e no Ildp tx tlv command page 221 e default Ildp tx tlv command page 222 Ildp status command page 222 e no
307. ommand output page 205 displays a sample output of the show interfaces config command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Saving the configuration to NVRAM 205 Figure 71 show interfaces config command output 2526TCconfig if S show interfaces 18 14 config Status Auto Flow Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control 16 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 11 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 12 Enable Down Down Enabled Custom 13 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 14 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled sseeed LAN interfaces configurat ionssence Filter Filter Untagged Unregistered Port Frames Frames PUID PRI Remarking Tagging Name 10 No Yes 1 l Disabled Untagfll Port 10 ii No Yes 1 6 Disabled Untagfll Port 11 12 No Yes 1 6 Disabled Untagfll Port 12 13 No Yes 1 6 Disabled Untagfll Port 13 14 No Yes a 6 Disabled Untagfll Port 14 x ULAN ID port member conf igurat ion eace Port_ ULAN_ULAN Name ULAN ULAN Name ULAN ULAN Name 2526T lt conf ig if gt Saving the configuration to NVRAM You can save your configuration parameters to Non Volatile RAM NVRAM using any of the following CLI commands e copy config nvram commana page 205 e write memory command page 205 e save config command page 206 copy config nvram command The copy config nvram co
308. omplete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP is deleted from tables contained in lldoRemoteSystemsData and IidpExtensions objects This counter is incremented only once when the complete set of information is completely deleted from all related tables Partial deletions such as a deletion of rows associated with a particular MSAP from some tables but not from all tables are not allowed and thus do not change the value of this counter RemTablesDrops The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP can not be entered into tables contained in IldoRemoteSystemsData and IldpExtensions objects because of insufficient resources RemTablesAgeouts The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP is deleted from tables contained in lldoRemoteSystemsData and IldpExtensions objects because the information timeliness interval has expired This counter is incremented only once when the complete set of information is completely invalidated aged out from all related tables Partial aging similar to deletion case is not allowed and thus does not change the value of this counter End Port tab With the Port tab you can set the optional TLVs to include in the LLPDUs transmitted by each port Use the following procedure to open the Port tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LL
309. omponent was added to the chassis If this action has not occurred since the cold warm start of the agent then the value is zero AdminState The state of the component or subcomponent The values that are read only are e other currently in some other state e notAvail actual value is not available The possible values that can be read and written are disable disables operation enable enables operation reset resets component test starts self test of component with the result to be normal warning nonFatalErr or fatalErr in object s5ChasComOperState The allowable and meaningful values are determined by the component type Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 265 Field Description OperState The current operational state of the component The possible values are other some other state notAvail state not available removed component removed disabled operation disabled normal normal operation resetInProg reset in progress testing doing a self test warning operating at warning level nonFatalErr operating at error level fatalErr error stopped operation The allowable and meaningful values are determined by the component type Ver The version number of the component or subcomponent If not av
310. onfigure network command e Manually loading the script in the console menu Automatically loading the script at boot up This chapter contains information about the following CLI topics e CLI command modes page 82 Port numbering page 85 e Accessing CLI page 86 Setting the system username and password page 87 e Getting help page 87 e Basic navigation page 87 e Managing basic system information page 96 e Managing MAC address forwarding database table page 98 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 82 CLI Basics CLI command modes Most CLI commands are available only under a certain command mode The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series has the following four command modes e User EXEC e Privileged EXEC e Global Configuration e Interface Configuration The User EXEC mode is the default mode it is also referred to as exec This command mode is the initial mode of access on powering up the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series In this command mode the user can access only a subset of the total CLI commands however the commands in this mode are available while the user is in any of the other four modes The commands in this mode are those you would generally need such aS ping and logout Commands in the Privileged EXEC mode are available to all other mod
311. ontain a dot The default domain name and addresses are saved in NVRAM The hostnames for ping and telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric characters and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255 characters This section covers these commands e show ip dns command page 185 e ping commana page 183 ip name server command page 186 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Using DNS to ping and telnet 185 e no ip name server commana page 187 e ip domain name command page 187 no ip domain name command page 188 e default ip domain name command page 188 show ip dns command The show ip dns command displays the DNS domain name as well as any configured DNS servers The syntax forthe show ip dns command is show ip dns The show ip dns command is executed in the User Exec command mode The show ip dns command has no parameters or variables Figure 59 show ip dns command output page 185 displays sample output from the show ip dns command Figure 59 show ip dns command output 255 T PWR show ip dns DNS Default Domain name None DNS Servers 6 0 6 8 2550T PWR ping command The ping command tests the network connection to another network device The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packet from the switch to the tar
312. ontrol the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet Routing Switch as part of the auto negotiation process Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 249 Configuring the switch using Device Manager This section describes how you can use Device Manager to configure your switch manage SNTP and display topology information The section includes information on the following topics e Viewing Unit information page 249 e Viewing switch IP information page 253 e Editing the chassis configuration page 258 e Working with configuration files page 272 e Working with SNTP page 276 e Displaying topology information using Device Manager page 279 Viewing Unit information You can view unit information by using the Unit dialog box To open the Unit dialog box use the following procedure Step Action 1 Double click on a single unit or select the units you want to edit 2 Do one of the following e From the shortcut menu choose Edit e From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Unit On the toolbar click Edit E End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 250 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Se LLL
313. oose Install Folder dialog box appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 108 Getting Started with Device Manager Choose Install Folder dialog box Choose Install Folder Where Would You Like to Install C Program Fees NortenioM Restore Defaut Folder Choose N 8 Fre installation simman Snstalling install Complete 8 Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM or click Choose to select a different storage path ATTENTION If Device Manager is already installed on your computer you must choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version 9 Click Next The Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box appears Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box Java Device Manager Where would you like to create product icons in anew Program Group ava Device Manager In an existing Program Group accessories zj EC 0 A Choose Shortcut Folder j C inthe Start Menu Fresnstaliation Summary lt i Dn the Desktop Sinstalling a a Inthe Quick Launch Bar C Other icraiPrograms Wortel ava Device Manager Choose C Dont create icons Install Complete T Create icons for Al Users Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 0
314. opyright 2007 Nortel Networks Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol 211 Table 71 no sntp server command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p lt primary secondary gt Enter the NTP server you want to clear e primary the IP address for the primary NTP server secondary the IP address for the secondary NTP server sntp sync now command The sntp sync now command forces a manual synchronization with the NTP server ATTENTION You must have SNTP enabled before this command can take effect The syntax for the sntp sync now command is sntp sync now The sntp sync now command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The sntp sync now command has no parameters or variables sntp sync interval command The sntp sync interval command specifies recurring synchronization with the NTP server in hours relative to initial synchronization The syntax forthe sntp sync interval command is sntp sync interval lt 0 168 gt The sntp sync interval command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 72 sntp sync interval command parameters and variables page 212 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp sync interval command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 2
315. or each port on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR Series using the CLI You enable the power and set the power limit and power priority on each port This section covers the following topics e no poe shutdown command page 161 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI 161 I LLL ee e poe poe shutdown command page 161 e poe poe priority command page 162 poe poe limit command page 163 no poe shutdown command The no poe shutdown command enables power to the port The syntax for the no poe shutdown command is no poe shutdown port lt portlist gt The no poe shutdown command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 36 no poe shutdown command parameters and variables page 161 describes the parameters and variables for the no poe shutdown command Table 36 no poe shutdown command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p port lt portlist gt Enter the port numbers on which you want to enable power The default value is enabled ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port entered with the interface FastEthernet command poe poe shutdown command The poe poe shutdown command disables power to the port The syntax for the poe poe shutdown
316. or reseller Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support web site and have a Nortel support contract you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the following web site to obtain the phone number for your region www nortel com callus Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code An Express Routing Code ERC is available for many Nortel products and services When you use an ERC your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service To locate the ERC for your product or service go to Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks How to get help 21 www nortel com erc Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 22 Introduction I eC SSCs Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series p
317. ories listed as follows Table 29 Help file locations page 143 describes the Help file locations Table 29 Help file locations Platform Default path Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows lt JDM Installation directory gt help plat NT Windows 2000 Windows XP ypus v410 zip Windows Vista UNIX After you unzip the file lt JDM Installation directory gt help platypus v410 help html the help html is the home page for the online help Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 144 Getting Started with Device Manager Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 145 Using the Web based management interface This chapter describes the requirements for using the Web based management interface and how to use it as a tool to configure your Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Requirements To use the web based management interface you need the following items A computer connected to a network port that is a member of the management VLAN e One of the following Web browsers installed on the computer Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 1 or later on Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP or Windows Vista Netscape Naviga
318. ortel Networks 184 System configuration using the CLI Figure 58 ping command responses page 184 shows sample ping responses Figure 58 ping command responses 255 T PWRHping 192 167 128 28 debug PING 192 167 126 28 56 64 gt data bytes Reply from 192 167 120 28 64 bytes icmp_seq 1 time 36 ms 192 167 126 28 PING Statistics 1 packets transmitted 1 packets received packet loss round trip ms min avg max 36 36 36 Host is reachable 255 T PURH Resetting the switch to default configuration The restore factory default command resets the switch to its default configuration The syntax for the restore factory default command is restore factory default y force where the y or force parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation If the y or force parameter is not included in the command the following message appears Warning the switch will be reset to factory default configuration Do you wish to continue y n Enter y to restore the switch to default The restore factory default command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Using DNS to ping and telnet Using the Domain Name Server DNS client you can ping or telnet to a host server or to a host by name To use this feature you must configure at least one DNS you may also configure a default domain name If you configure a default domain name that name is appended to hostnames that do not c
319. outing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 rmon history lt 1 65535 gt lt LINE gt lt 1 65535 gt lt 1 3600 gt owner lt LINE gt rmon stats lt 1 65535 gt lt port gt owner lt LINE gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 save config show arp table show auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt show auto negotiation capabilities port lt portlist gt show auto pvid show autosave save config commana page 206 Displaying the ARP table page 202 Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA page 244 show auto negotiation capabilities command page 245 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show autosave command page 206 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 365 Command show autotopology nmm table Page No show autotopology nmm table page 217 show autotopology settings show autotopology settings page 216 show banner custom static show config network show banner
320. ow Port Tooltip Refresh Port Tooltip Refresh PoE Status Table 24 Switch unit shortcut menu command page 132 describes the Switch unit shortcut menu command on the switch unit shortcut menu i _ lt lt _ S amp L ee Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 132 Getting Started with Device Manager Table 24 Switch unit shortcut menu command Command Description Edit Opens a dialog box that provides basic hardware information about the switch and lets you set the Rate Limiting configuration for the switch unit Show Port Indicates that the tooltip function is active When unchecked Tooltip the tooltip function is disabled A Tooltip is a descriptive text box that appears when the mouse pointer is held over a port Refresh Port Refreshes the tooltip information Tooltip Refresh PoE Refreshes the status for PoE ports Status The port shortcut menu provides a faster path for editing and graphing a single port however you can access the same options using the menu bar or the toolbar Figure 38 Port shortcut menu Port 1 5 Edit Graph Enable Disable Table 25 Port shortcut menu commands page 132 describes the commands on the port shortcut menu Table 25 Port shortcut menu commands Command Description Edit Opens a dialog box that lets you set o
321. p for the switch but lets the switch boot normally BootP Disabled Choose this mode to inform the switch to use the IP configuration parameters stored in nonvolatile LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings 321 memory each time the switch boots If a BootP configuration is in progress when you issue this command the BootP configuration stops BootP or Last Address Choose this mode to inform the switch at each startup to obtain its IP configuration using BootP If the BootP request fails the switch uses the network parameters stored in its nonvolatile memory ATTENTION Valid parameters obtained in using BootP always replace current information stored in the nonvolatile memory ATTENTION Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests the BootP process times out if a reply is not received within 7 minutes approximately When the process times out the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode To restart the BootP process change the BootP request mode to any of the three following modes BootP or Default IP BootP Always or to BootP or Last Address IP Setting In Band XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a new stack IP address in Stack IP the appropriate format Address In Band XXX XXX XXX XX
322. pates in a stack configuration a stack MAC address is automatically assigned during stack initialization The stack MAC address is the base unit MAC address plus 1 If another unit in the stack is assigned as the base unit the new stack MAC address is the MAC address of the new base unit plus 1 The original stack IP address still applies to the new base unit Stack configurations Due to stack parameters being associated with the base unit the physical stack order depends on the base unit position and whether the stack is configured cascade up stack up or cascade down stack down This designation depends on the stack cabling arrangement The system automatically numbers the physical units based on the designated base unit Unit 1 In a cascade down configuration the base unit is physically located as the top unit in the stack The cable connected to the Cascade Down connector of the base unit terminates in the Cascade Up connector on the next unit in the stack which is physically located below the base unit This next unit is designated Unit 2 The stack is wired downward through the units and the system continues to number in this manner throughout the stack In this configuration the base unit discovers the stack in a cascade down stack down direction The following illustration demonstrates a cascade down stack down configuration Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 0
323. pe for this interface Mtu Size of the largest packet in octets that can be sent or received on the interface PhysAddress MAC address assigned to a particular interface AdminStatus OperStatus LastChange LinkTrap Current administrative state of the device which can be one of the following e up e down When a managed system is initialized all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the up state AdminStatus changes to the down state or remains in the up state as a result of either management action or the configuration information available to the managed system Current operational state of the interface which can be one of the following e up down e testing If AdminStatus is up then OperStatus should be up if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic If AdminStatus is down then OperStatus should be down It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed Value of the time the interface entered its current operational state If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem the value is zero Specifies whether linkUp linkDown traps should be generated for this interface Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard
324. perating parameters for the port Graph Opens a dialog box that displays statistics for the port and lets you display the statistics as a graph Enable Administratively brings a port up Disable Administratively shuts down a port The color of the port changes to red in the device view Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing objects 133 Status bar The status bar displays error and informational messages from the software application These messages are not related to the device being managed Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes Table 26 Device Manager buttons page 133 describes buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes Table 26 Device Manager buttons Button Name Description ea Insert Opens a dialog box to create a new entry for a table as then from the dialog box inserts the new entry in the table Copy Copies selected cells from a table Paste Pastes copied values to a currently selected table cell Reset Causes changed but not applied fields to revert amp Changes to their previous values Print Table or Prints the table or graph that is displayed Print Graph Stop Stop Refresh Stops the current action compiling saving and so forth If you are updating or compiling a large data table the Refresh button changes to a Stop button wh
325. pology table NmmCurNum The current number of entries in the NMM topology table Topology Table tab To view more topology information use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt Topology The Topology dialog box appears with the Topology tab displayed 2 Click the Topology Table tab The Topology Table tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 281 Figure 99 ch ect dialog box Topology Table tab Z 192 167 120 28 Topolooy r Sena macada chassistype theltype Locaiseg Curstate 0 0 192 167 120 28 0 00 19 69 af c8 01 mERS2500 26T eee oc heartbeat t 24 192 167 120 8 265 00 00 c0 83 10 20 mPassport 1648 lenetFastGignet true esia EB End The following table describes the Topology Table tab fields Table 127 Topology Table tab fields Field Description Slot The slot number in the chassis in which the topology message was received Port The port on which the topology message was received pAddr The IP address of the sender of the topology message Segld The segment identifier of the segment from which the remote agent sent the topology message This value is extracted from the message MacAddr The MAC addre
326. port lt portlist gt full halfjauto eapol disable enable speed command page 237 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 eapol guest vlian vid lt 1 4094 gt enable eapol port lt portlist gt init status authorized unauthorized auto traffic control in out in re authentication enable disable re authentication period lt 1 604800 gt re authenticate quiet interval lt num gt transmit interval lt num gt supplicant timeout lt num gt server timeout lt num gt max request lt num gt enable command Enabling CANA end command exit flowcontrol port lt portlist gt asymmetric symmetrid auto disable help http port lt 1024 65535 gt interface FastEthernet lt portlist gt ip address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt netmask lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt ip bootp server last needed disable always ip domain name lt LINE gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 enable commana page 91 Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA page 244 end command page 92 exit command page 92 Enabling flow control page 240 help command page 89 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management N
327. port and the link is good speed Flashing This port is disabled by software The switch failed the self test Status Switch Flashing The switch is booting up and performing status a self test Self test passed successfully and switch is operational Steady This port is set to operate at 10 100 Mb s and the link is good Flashing This port is disabled by software Link Act RJ45 SFP Link is OK UPNK pot Flashing Traffic activity status No link No traffic Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 29 Link Act Port conne Steady Station connected at 10 100 Mb s Flashing Traffic activity at 10 100 Mb s No link No traffic PoE applie Power is supplied to the port ction status s to PWR No power is supplied to the port models P PP p only Base unit This unit is permanent base in stack status for mode stack mode This unit is selected as temporary base in stack mode Back panel The back panel of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is shown in Figure 7 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series back panel page 29 Table 3 Components on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series back panel page 29 describes the components on the back panel Figure 7 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series
328. ports names Displays the interface names verbose Displays information about STP and EAP Figure 68 show interfaces names command output page 203 displays a sample output of the show interfaces names command Figure 68 show interfaces names command output 2556T lt config if show interfaces name 1 3 Port Name 1 LabBldg 2 Testing 3 FloorBldgq Figure 69 show interfaces command output page 203 shows a sample output of the show interfaces command without the names variable Figure 69 show interfaces command output 255 T PWRitshow interfaces Status Auto Flow Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 2 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 3 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 4 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 5 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 6 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full Disable Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 8 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 9 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 16 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled ii Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 12 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 13 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 14 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 15 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 16 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 17 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 18 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 19 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled More q Quit space return Cont inue gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500
329. pports two UNIX platforms and one Linux platform e a UNIX SPARC workstation running the Sun Solaris 2 7 2 8 2 1 0 or higher e aPC running Linux Kernel 2 2 operating system or higher The minimum system requirements for installing JOM on any UNIX or Linux platform are 4 MB available in a temporary directory e 400 MB free in the directory where you want to install the JDM software e 512 MB DRAM Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD To install the JDM software to a Solaris environment from the CD use the following procedure Step Action 1 Close all programs 2 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 Navigate to the Solaris JDM subdirectory on the software CD 4 Run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc sh file See Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux page 113 End Installing JDM on Linux from the CD To install the Device Manager software to a Linux environment from the CD use the following procedure Step Action 1 Close all programs 2 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 Navigate to the Linux JDM subdirectory on the software CD 4 Run the jdm_xxxx_linux sh file Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 112 Getting Started with Device Manager See Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux page 113
330. r adding unit 4 page 57 after adding unit 4 to the stack the CFG 4 mirror image is created in the BU unit 1 Figure 16 CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 4 Unit 1 BU in stack Unit 2 NBU in stack Unit 3 NBU in stack Unit 4 NBU in stack MAC Address 1 MAC Address 2 MAC Address 3 MAC Address 4 DRAM DRAM CFG2 CFG 1 Mirror Image Mirror Image CFG3 Mirror Image CFG 4 Mirror Image Removing an NBU When an NBU is removed from a stack the related CFG mirror image in the stack becomes INACTIVE The AUR feature ensures that the stack always has two copies of an INACTIVE CFG mirror image These two copies must not reside in the same unit in the stack For example after the removal of unit 4 from the stack shown in Figure 16 CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 4 page 57 the CFG 4 mirror image becomes INACTIVE see Figure 17 CFG mirror images after removing unit 4 page 58 Another copy of the INACTIVE CFG 4 mirror image is also created in unit 2 L Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 58 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Figure 17 CFG mirror images after removing unit 4 Unit 1 BU in stack MAC Address 1 CFG 1 Image DRAM CFG 2 Mirror Image CFG3 Mirror Image INACTIVE CFG 4 Mirror Image Unit 2 NBU i
331. r bar graph to a line graph Area Chart Converts a line graph or bar graph to an area graph Bar Chart Converts a line graph or area graph to a bar graph Pie Chart Converts a line graph or area graph to a pie chart Telnet session From Device Manager you can initiate a Telnet session to the switch you are currently accessing To Telnet to a switch gt Do one of the following From the Device Manager main menu choose Device gt Telnet On the toolbar click the Telnet button o A Telnet window to the switch appears Opening an SSH connection to the device From Device Manager you can initiate a Secure Shell SSH connection to the the switch you are currently accessing To open an SSH connection to a device use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Opening the web based management home page 141 gt Do one of the following e From the Device Manager main menu choose Device gt SSH Connection e On the toolbar click the SSH button An SSH window to the device appears ATTENTION The SSH connection is established only when the device is SSH capable and enabled For more information on SSH connections see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Opening the web based mana
332. r changes Stacking capabilities page 39 Stacking functionality delivery page 40 Stack configurations page 49 Auto Unit Replacement page 54 For information about changes that are not feature related see the following sections Information on the new fields StackInsertionUnitNumber and AutoUnitReplacementEnabled are updated for the System tab under Configuring the switch using Device Manager chapter For more information see System tab page 259 Changed the screen for License File tab For more information see Copying the license file using the Java Device Manager page 42 Information on the new tabs Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time are updated with new procedure and screens For more information see Configuring local time zone using the device manager page 278 Configuring daylight savings time using the device manager page 278 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 16 New in this release I SC Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Introduction This guide provides information about configuring and managing basic switching features on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series This guide describes the features of
333. r different categories of statistics for the selected object Figure 45 Statistics dialog box for a port 192 168 249 21 Graph Port 1 7 x Tiiteiface Ethernet Errors Bridge Rmon EAPOL Stats EAPOL Diag LACP BB S 0 8 5 Counters Close Help Poll Intervat 10 0 day 00h 00m 10s 3 Select a tab for the group of statistics you want to view 4 On the displayed data table click and drag to select the cells you want to graph They must be in the same row or column 5 Click one of the graph buttons at the bottom of the dialog box A graph dialog box appears for the selected graph type 6 To print a copy of the graph click Print End Buttons at the top of the graph dialog boxes for line area and bar graphs allow you to change the orientation of the graph change the scale or change the graph type The following table describes the buttons in the graph dialog boxes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 140 Getting Started with Device Manager Table 28 Graph dialog box buttons Button Name Description Stacked Stacks data quantities instead of displaying them side by side Rotates the graph 90 degrees Log Scale Changes the scale of the x axis of an unrotated graph from numeric to logarithmic Line Chart Converts an area graph o
334. r installation on multiple switches Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Stacking functionality delivery 41 A Stacking License Certificate contains instructions on how to deposit license entitlements into a license bank enter switch MAC address es create the license file then download and copy the license file onto each switch requiring stacking functionality These instructions are carried out on the Nortel Licensing portal web site at www nortellicensing com ATTENTION Once a valid license file is downloaded on to an Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series switch you can configure the operational mode of rear ports to Stacking Mode Although the rear ports are set to Stacking Mode a reboot of the switch is required to fully enable the stacking operation Working with license files using the CLI With the following commands you can copy the license file to your switch and display or clear the existing license information e copy tftp license commana page 41 show license command page 42 clear license command page 42 copy tftp license command The copy tftp license command copies the license file from a TFTP server to your switch After you copy the license to the switch you need to perform a reboot to activate the license ATTENTION The license is copied to NV
335. r measurement command 166 show rate limit command 243 show rear ports mode 46 show running config command 191 show sntp command 208 show sys info command 96 195 195 show tech command 97 show terminal command 193 194 show tftp server command 198 shutdown command 94 233 signal power pair 158 signal power pairs 168 Simple Network Time Protocol 68 single object selecting 129 Slot field 281 SNMP traps 142 SNTP 68 68 208 276 local time zone 69 SNTP dialog box 276 snip enable command 209 sntp server primary address command 209 snip server secondary address command 210 sntp sync interval command 211 sntp sync now command 211 software image upgrades 72 software download Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 19 November 2007 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 02 02 Standard Index 387 LED indication descriptions process 231 328 329 Software Download page 328 software installation UNIX 111 Windows 103 Software Version field 152 software version requirements Microsoft Internet Explorer 145 Netscape Navigator 145 software versions 96 151 software downloading 229 spare power pair 158 spare power pairs 168 speed 202 237 speed command 237 SSH 140 SSH button 128 SSH session 128 Stack configuration 45 Stack Info tab 263 Stack Information page 151 stack information viewing 151 stack licensing 40 Stack Numbering page 154 Stack Numbering
336. r the clock summer time command is clock summer time lt zone gt date lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hh mm gt lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hh mm gt lt offset gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 214 System configuration using the CLI The clock summer time command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 75 clock summer time command parameters and variables page 214 describes the parameters and variables for the clock summer time command Table 75 clock summer time command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p zone The acronym to display when summer time is in effect If unspecified default to the time zone acronym Range up to 4 characters date lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hh mm gt lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hh mm gt e day day of the month Range 1 to 31 e month month Range first three letters by name The first date specifies when summer time should start and the second date specifies when summer time should end e hh mm time in military format in hours and minutes ATTENTION lt day gt lt month gt parameters can also be entered in order lt month gt lt day gt offset Number of minutes to add during summer time Range 840 to 840
337. r the next boot of Protocol the agent CurrentMgmtProtocol The current transport protocol s that the agent supports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 261 Field Description BootMode This setting determines how the management interface of the switch can be assigned an IP address the next time the switch boots The four BootMode options are bootpDisabled use the IP address contained in the configuration file bootpAlways always attempt to get an IP address from the network bootpOrDefaultIP attempt to get an IP address from the network only when one is not contained in the configuration file bootpOrLastAddress attempt to get an IP address from the network and if that fails use the IP address that was in use on this switch before the last reboot ImageLoadMode The source from which the agent image is loaded at the next boot CurrentImageVersion The version number of the agent image that is currently used on the switch LocalStoragelmage The version number of the agent image that is stored in Version flash memory on the switch NextBootDefault The IP address of the default gateway for the agent to Gateway use after the next time the switch is booted CurrentDefault The IP address of the default gateway that is currently Gateway in
338. r usage 159 164 power sharing options 168 priority 176 status codes 158 traps 160 168 173 174 usage 158 poe poe limit command 163 poe poe pd detect type command 158 poe poe power usage threshold command 159 poe poe priority command 162 poe poe shutdown command 161 poe poe trap command 160 PoE tab for a single unit 172 polling interval 138 port 233 port autonegotiation speed configuring 324 port color legend 131 port communication speed configuring 334 port configurations PoE 170 port connections troubleshooting 339 Port field 281 309 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 4 1 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 02 02 Standard 19 November 2007 Index 385 Port Management page 325 port number and port list 85 port power limit 163 port priority PoE 170 Port Property page 170 port shortcut menu 132 port enabling or disabling 233 port power detection 176 PortActiveComponent field 307 310 portlist 85 portnum 85 ports 237 color coded 130 controlling 303 disabled 131 editing 303 303 307 naming 202 235 selecting 129 viewing 303 307 power DC source 158 disabling 160 enabling 160 enabling or disabling 170 Power 175 power balancing 162 power being used 173 power cord warnings multilingual 31 power cords power detection 158 power detection per port 176 Power field 173 power limit 160 power limit per port 163 power management 167 Po
339. r using the Device Manager software The section includes information on the following topics Starting Device Manager page 119 Setting the Device Manager properties page 120 e Opening a device page 123 e Device Manager window page 126 e Editing objects page 133 e Working with statistics and graphs page 134 Telnet session page 140 e Opening an SSH connection to the device page 140 e Opening the Web based management home page page 141 Trap log page 142 e Online Help page 143 Starting Device Manager gt Do one of the following depending upon your operating system environment e Ina Microsoft Windows environment choose All Programs gt Nortel gt Java Device Manager gt DM from the Windows Start menu e In a UNIX environment verify that the Device Manager installation directory is in your search path then enter JDM The initial Device Manager window appears ATTENTION On startup the Device Manager performs a DNS lookup for the machine on which it is running If the DNS lookup is slow or fails the initial Device Manager window may take up to 30 seconds to open Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 120 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 30 Device Manager window zioixi e eat gamm mo aE NOR
340. rateinnern befinden sich keine Komponenten die vom Benutzer gewartet werden k nnen Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 338 Troubleshooting WARNING Avertissement Pour viter tout risque d lectrocution ne jamais retirer le capot de l appareil Cet appareil ne contient aucune pi ce accessible par l utilisateur WARNING Advertencia A fin de evitar da os personales por corrientes el ctricas peligrosas no desmonte nunca la cubierta superior de este dispositivo Los componentes internos no son reparables por el usuario WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare lesioni fisiche dovute a scariche pericolose di corrente non rimuovere mai il coperchio superiore del dispositivo componenti interni non possono essere manipolati dall utente gt ERB BRD DIA ERES Orb TIIRO HIS ERLTHO EROTS AKTIE FRRIAVAR AY higy EHA Normal power up sequence In a normal power up sequence the LEDs appear as follows 1 After power is applied to the switch the Pwr Power LED turns on within 5 seconds 2 The switch initiates a self test during which the port LEDs display various patterns to indicate the progress of the self test 3 After the self test the remaining port LEDs indicate their operational status as described in the following table Nortel Ethernet Routing
341. red in Stacking Mode at the factory and are ready for immediate use for connection in a stack configuration Stacking Mode is the default operating mode that cannot be overridden by a factory default Standalone Mode operation is still available for configuration on the rear ports of stack enabled units For information on adding or replacing a new unit see Adding Replacing a stack unit page 53 All factory pre enabled units are identifiable through CLI Web UI and Device Manager with the text Stack Enabled included in the switch description for identification purposes Standalone configuration with license files Standalone units are not pre enabled with stacking capability in the factory and require the use of a software based licensing mechanism to unlock stacking functionality for activation on the rear ports Standalone units use the GenLic engine for decryption of a license file The license file must contain the switch MAC address to unlock the stacking functionality Standalone units require the purchase of an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series Stacking License Kit of which there are four types available Each kit contains a License Certificate with a License Authorization Code LAC that enables a specific number of stacking licenses for one or multiple ERS 2500 series switches Each ERS 2500 series switch requires one license file to unlock stacking functionality A single license file can contain up to 1000 switch MAC addresses fo
342. riables Figure 88 show rate limit command output page 243 displays sample output from the show rate limit command Figure 88 show rate limit command output 2526Ttshow rate limit Packet Type Limit rate limit command The rate limit command configures rate limiting on the switch The syntax for the rate limit command is rate limit multicast broadcast both lt 0 262143 gt The rate limit command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 103 rate limit command parameters and variables page 244 describes the parameters and variables for the rate limit command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 244 Ethernet port management using the CLI Table 103 rate limit command parameters and variables Parameters and values Description multicast Applies rate limiting in packets second to the broadcast both specified type of traffic 0 26214 eer 5 g A e multicast applies rate limiting to multicast packets broadcast applies rate limiting to broadcast packets both applies rate limiting to both multicast and broadcast packets no rate limit command The no rate limit command disables rate limiting on the switch stack The syntax for the no rate limit command is no rate limit The no rate limit command is executed in the Globa
343. ries of this provision Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customer s Software activation or usage levels If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software 2 Warranty Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer Software is provided AS IS without any warranties conditions of any kind NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES CONDITIONS FOR THE SOFTWARE EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON INFRINGEMENT Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of any kind for the Software Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties and in such event the above exclusions may not apply 3 Limitation of Remedies INNO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING a DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM b LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO CUSTOMER S RECORDS FILES OR DATA OR c DIRECT IN
344. rivileged EXEC mode exit to exit to Global Configuration mode The prompt displays the switch name and the current CLI command mode For example e User EXEC 2500T gt e Privileged EXEC 2500T e Global Configuration 2500T config e Interface Configuration 2500T config if See Appendix Command List page 353 for a complete alphabetical list of all CLI commands and where they are explained The initial command mode in CLI depends on your access level when you logged into the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series e With no password protection you can enter the CLI in userExec mode and use the enable command to move to the privExec command mode e If you have logged into the CLI with read only access you enter the CLI in userExec mode and cannot access any other CLI command modes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Port numbering 85 If you have logged into the CLI with read write access you enter the CLI in privExec mode and use the commands to move to the other command modes Port numbering The port numbering for different versions of Ethernet switches are listed as follows Ethernet Routing Switch 2526 has 24 10 100 Mb s ports on the front as well as two combo ports which includes two GBIC or two copper ports at 10 100 1000Mbps The switch also provides two 1000 M
345. rmware version EZ av agent version Fields are separated with a pipe symbol Forward slashes are required to indicate that an entry is continued to the next line 3E Jk Jk Jk JE Jt Jk k J J F F Fk pE E p p p p t Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 352 Appendix C Sample BootP configuration file I Caution Omitting a Forward slash when the entry is continued to the next line can cause the interruption of the booting process or the incorrect image file to download Always include forward slashes where needed Important Note If a leading zero 0 is used in the IP address it is calculated as an octal number If the leading character is x upper or lower case it is calculated as a hexadecimal number For example if an IP address with a base 10 number of 45 is written as 045 in the BOOTPTAB TXT file the Bootp protocol assigns 037 to the client Global entries are defined that specify the parameters used by every device Note that hardware type ht is specified first in the global entry The following global entry is defined for an Ethernet device Note that this is where a client s subnet mask sm and default gateway gw are defined global1 ht ethernet hd c opt images sm 255 255 2
346. rol port lt portlist gt default http port default ip address default ip bootp server default flowcontrol command page 242 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 default ip address command page 179 default ip bootp server commana page 197 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix D Command List 355 Command default ip default gateway Page No default ip default gateway commana page 181 default ip domain name default ip domain name commana page 188 default ip netmask default lacp aggregation port lt portlist gt enable default lacp key port lt portlist gt default lacp mode port lt portlist gt default lacp priority port lt portlist gt default lacp system priority default lacp timeout time port lt portlist gt default Ildp port lt portlist gt config notification default Ildp port lt portlist gt status default Ildp tx interval tx hold multiplier reinit delay tx delay notification interval default Ildp tx tlv port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr port desc sys cap sys desc sys name default logging default logging remote level default mac address table aging time default name port lt port ist gt defaul
347. rom the agent are enabled e true indicates that notifications are enabled false indicates that notifications are disabled Ters Enable Sets the optional Management TLVs to be included in the transmitted LLDPDUs e portDesc Port Description TLV e sysName System Name TLV e sysDesc System Description TLV e sysCap System Capabilities TLV ATTENTION The Local Management tab controls Management Address TLV transmission End TX Stats tab With the TX Stats tab you can view LLDP transmit statistics by port Use the following procedure to open the TX Stats tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the TX Stats tab The TX Stats tab appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 288 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 102 TX Stats tab Globus Port TX SRR Rx Stats Local System Local Port Local Management Neighbor Neighbor Mgmt Address Unknown TLV Organizational Defined Info Fremestota a C a E AE Oros The following table describes the TX Stats tab fields Table 130 TX Stats tab fields Fea oeenn SSCS FramesTotal the number of LLDP frames transmitted by this
348. rovides wire speed switching for high performance low cost connections to full duplex and half duplex 10 100 1000 Mb s Ethernet Local Area Networks LAN Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software release 4 1 supports the following devices e Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T e Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR e Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T e Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR This chapter describes the hardware features and components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series devices It includes information about the following topics e Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series page 23 Network configuration examples page 34 Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Front panel Figure 1 Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR page 24 shows an Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR providing power and Ethernet connections to IP Phones and data connections to personal computers PC Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 24 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware Figure 1 Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR The following graphics display the front panel configuration on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T 2526T PWR 2550T and 2550T PWR Table 1 Components on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 front panel page 25 describes the component
349. rs Fatal Error and Not Configured Stack Invent The unit number assigned to the device by the network ory manager For more information about stack numbering see Changing stack numbering page 154 Description The description of the device or its subcomponent Pluggable port The SFP GBICs connected to the switch Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Viewing summary information 153 Section Fields Software Version Description The current running software version Operational State The current operational state of the stack The operational states are Other Not Available Removed Disabled Normal Reset in Progress Testing Warning Non Fatal Errors Fatal Error and Not Configured Viewing summary information You can view summary information about the switch For example the unit number and its corresponding physical description and serial number To view summary switch information use the following procedure gt From the main menu choose Summary gt Switch Information The Switch Information page appears Figure 50 Switch Information page Summary gt Switch Information Switch Information Module Description Pluggable Port 49 Pluggable Port 50 Firmware Version Software Version 410 01 Manufacturing Date Code 09262006 Hardware Version
350. rver or to a host by name To use this feature you must configure at least one Domain Name Server DNS You can also configure a default domain name If you configure a default domain name that name is appended to host names that do not contain a dot The default domain name and addresses are saved in NVRAM Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 70 System configuration software features The host names for ping and Telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric characters and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255 characters Configuring with CLI You can use the CLI to configure the DNS client Following are the commands used to configure the DNS client using the CLI e show ip dns command ping command ip name server command no ip name server command e ip domain name command no ip domain name command default ip domain name command You can also use the ping command to specify additional ping parameters including the number of ICMP packets to be sent the packet size the interval between packets and the timeout You can also set the ping to continuous or you can set a debug flag to obtain extra debug information For more information about these commands see System configuration using the CLI page 177 BootP automatic IP configuration MAC address The E
351. s 3 Click OK End The following table describes the Properties dialog box fields Table 17 Properties dialog box fields wea O Sea oesi O Retry Count Number of times Device Manager sends the same polling request if a response is not returned to Device Manager You may want to set this field to three or four Timeout Length of each retry of each polling waiting period When you access the device through a slow link you may want to increase the timeout interval and then change the Retransmission Strategy to superlinear Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 122 Getting Started with Device Manager Description Polling Web Management Application Control Listen for Traps Max Traps in Log Trap Port Listen for Syslogs The trace field is used to enable and disable SNMP tracing When Trace is selected SNMP protocol data units PDUs are displayed in the Device gt Log dialog box When selected enabled Device Manager listens for traps from the device The specified number of traps that may exist in the trap log The default is 500 Specifies the UDP port that Device Manager listens to receive SNMP traps When selected enabled Device Manager listens to the syslog Confirm row deletion Default Read Community Default Write Community
352. s Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree mstp status Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree rstp config Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree rstp port config lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree rstp port statistics lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree rstp port status lt portlist gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree rstp statistics Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show spanning tree rstp status Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show ssh download auth key Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show ssh global Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 show ssh session
353. s buttons that provide quick access to commonly used commands and some additional actions Table 21 Toolbar buttons page 128 describes the toolbar buttons LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 128 Getting Started with Device Manager Table 21 Toolbar buttons Button Name Description Menu bar equivalent Open Opens the Open Device dialog Device gt Open Device box Refresh Refreshes the device view Device gt Refresh Device information Status Status Telnet Opens a Telnet session Device gt Telnet SSH Opens an SSH session Device gt SSH Connection Trap Log Opens the trap log Device gt Trap Log Help Opens online Help in a Web Help gt Device browser Edit Displays configuration data for Edit gt Port Selected the selected chassis object Graph Opens statistics and graphing Graph gt Port Selected dialog boxes for the selected Graph gt Chassis object Home Opens the Web Management Actions gt Open Home Page Software Home Page Page Alarm Opens the Rmon Alarm Rmon gt Alarm Manager Manager Manager Be Be KeA ee le Device view The device view lets you determine at a glance the operating status of the various units and ports in your hardware configuration You can also use the device view to perform management tasks on sp
354. s configuration and the nonvolatile log to flash memory Autosave also automatically saves your configuration information across reboots You can enable or disable this feature When you disable autosave changes in the configuration file are not saved to the flash memory This section contains information about the following commands e show autosave command page 206 e autosave enable command page 207 e no autosave enable commana page 207 e default autosave enable command page 207 ATTENTION You can use the CLI command copy config nvram to force a manual save of the configuration when autosave is disabled show autosave command The show autosave command displays the status of the autosave feature either enabled or disabled The syntax for the show autosave command is show autosave The show autosave command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling and disabling autosave 207 L e The show autosave command has no parameters or variables Figure 72 show autosave command output page 207 displays sample output from the show autosave command Figure 72 show autosave command output 2556T PWR lt config gt show autosave Auto Save Enable 255 T PWR lt conf ig gt autosave enable command The autosave en
355. s displayed during the software download process Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 330 Configuring the switch using web based management ATTENTION The LED indications described in the following table apply to a 2526T switch model Although a 2550T switch provides similar LED indications the LED indication sequence is associated within the 48 port range Table 147 LED Indications during the software download process Phase Description LED Indications The switch downloads the new 100 Mb s port status LEDs ports 18 to 24 software image and programs it only The LEDs begin to turn on in succession on each ASIC as follows ASIC 1 from port 1 to port 12 and return ASIC 2 from with port 24 to port 13 and return ASIC 3 from port 25 to port 36 and return ASIC 4 from port 48 to port 37 and return The switch resets automatically After the reset completes the new software image initiates the switch self test which comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests ATTENTION The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress Downloading ASCII configuration files The ASCII Config Download feature lets you upload an ASCII configuration file from a personal computer to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series In the current implementation
356. s on the front panel Figure 2 Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T front panel Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 25 Figure 3 Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T front panel Figure 4 Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR front panel 1 2 3 Figure 5 Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T PWR front panel Table 1 Components on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 front panel Item Description 1 Console port SFP Gigabit Interface Converter GBIC slots 10 100BaseT RJ 45 connector ports copper 10 100 1000BaseT RuJ 45 connector ports copper PoE ports on 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR models only on AJOJN Console port With the Console port you can access the Command Line Interface CLI commands to customize your network For more information about using the CLI see CLI Basics page 81 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 26 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware The Console port is a DB 9 RS 232 D male serial port connector You can use this connector to connect a management station console or terminal to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series by using
357. sage Threshold feo a Power Pair Signal Traps Control Enable PD Detect Type 802 3ef z Power Source Present AC Only AC Power Status Present DC Power Status Not present The following table describes the items on the Global Power Management page Table 42 Global Power Management page items Item Description Available DTE Displays the amount of power available to powered devices from the switch Power DTE Power Status Displays the status of the PoE feature It displays e Normal all power functioning correctly e _Error PoE failed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring PoE using web based management 169 Item Description DTE Power Consumption Displays total power use on all devices currently drawing power DTE Power Usage Threshold Power Pair Enter the percentage of total power consumption on the switch necessary to trigger a trap The default value is 80 Displays the power pair of the RJ 45 pin connectors that supplies the power The only available option for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Seris is Signal ATTENTION Ensure that the power pair used by the IP devices you are powering matches the power pair for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Traps Control Choose to enable or disable trap from agent PD Detec
358. sed management interface use the following procedure Step Action 1 Start your Web browser 2 In the address bar type the IP address for your host switch for example http 192 168 151 175 and press Enter The home page appears Web based management interface home page NO RTEL Administration gt System Information Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T Access RW gt Summary Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T HW 0A FW 1 0 0 12 gt Configuration sysDescription cw v4 10 059 BN 59 c Nortel Networks gt Fault sysUpTime 14 Hours 13 Minutes 22 Seconds gt Ststiatics syeContact Deswevveveerere gt Applications sysName M Administration System Information sysLocation Quick Start gt Security 7 Logout gt Reset 7 Reset To Detault gt Suppor End Network security does not exist the first time you access the embedded Web server The system administrator must create access parameters and passwords to protect the integrity of your network configuration s For more information see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Logging in to the web based management interface 147 Menu The menu is the same for all pages It contains a list of seven main headings
359. session The syntax for the logout command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Basic navigation 91 I lt _ Le logout The Logout command is in all command modes The logout command has no parameters or variables enable command The enable command changes the command mode from User EXEC to Privileged Exec mode The syntax for the enable command is enable The enable command is executed in the User Exec command mode The enable command has no parameters or variables configure command The configure command moves you to the Global Configuration config command mode and identifies the source for the configuration commands The syntax for the configure command is configure terminal network The configure command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode Table 11 configure command parameters and variables page 91 describes the parameters and variables for the configure command Table 11 configure command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p terminal network Specifies the source for the configuration commands for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series terminal a you to enter Global Configuration command mode to enter configuration commands network lets you set up parameters for auto loading a script at boot up or for
360. specifications Models 2526T 2526T PWR 2550T 2550T PWR Input current Maximum 0 8 A Maximum 2 9 A Input voltage rms 100 240 VAC at 50 60Hz 100 240 VAC at 50 60 Hz Power consumptio Maximum 96 W Maximum 350 W n Thermal rating 327 Btu h maximum 500 Btu h maximum Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 376 Appendix E Technical specifications Physical dimensions Table 159 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series page 376 lists physical dimensions for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Table 159 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Parameter Specifications Height 1 U 44 mm 1 73 in Width 441 0 mm 17 36 in Depth 2526T and 2526T PWR 309 mm 12 17 in Depth 2550T and 2550T PWR 369 mm 14 53 in Weight 2526T and 2526T PWR Weight 2550T and 2550T PWR 9 4 lbs 11 6 Ibs Performance specifications Table 160 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series page 376 lists performance specifications for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Table 160 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Parameter Specifications Frame Forward Rate 10 2 Million packets second Mpps on 2550T 2550T P 64 byte packets WR and 6 6 Mpps on 2526T 252
361. ss of the sender of the topology message ChassisType The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message BkplType The backplane type of the device that sent the topology message LocalSeg Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment as the reporting agent CurState The current state of the sender of the topology message The choices are e topChanged Topology information has recently changed e heartbeat Topology information is unchanged e new The sending agent is in a new state Configuring LLDP using Device Manager Use the following tabs to configure LLDP properties for local and neighbor systems e LLDP Globals tab page 282 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 282 Configuring the switch using Device Manager e Port tab page 285 e TX Stats tab page 287 e Graphing LLDP transmit statistics page 288 e RX Stats tab page 289 e Graphing LLDP receive statistics page 291 e Local System tab page 291 e Local Port tab page 292 Local Management tab page 294 e Neighbor tab page 295 e Neighbor Mgmt Address tab page 297 e Unknown TLV tab page 299 e Organizational Defined Info tab page 300 LLDP Globals tab With the Globals tab you can configure LLDP transmit properties an
362. st gt off passive active Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lacp priority port lt portlist gt lt 0 255 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lacp system priority 0 65535 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lacp timeout time port lt portlist gt short long Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 lidp port lt portlist gt config notification IIdp config notification commana page 219 lidp port lt portlist gt status rxOnly txAndRx IIdp status command page 222 txOnly Ildp tx interval lt 5 32768 gt tx hold multiplier idp command page 218 lt 2 10 gt reinit delay lt 1 10 gt tx delay lt 1 8192 gt notification interval lt 5 3600 gt lidp tx tlv port lt portlist gt local mgmt addr IIdp tx tlv command page 221 port desc sys cap sys desc sys name logging enable disable level crit Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series ical serious informational nv level Performance Management System Monitoring critical serious informational none NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN4
363. stall the new software to a different directory You can have multiple versions of Device Manager stored on your Windows UNIX or Linux machine provided that each version is stored in a separate directory ATTENTION Do not install the JDM to a directory where a previous version of Device Manager software already exists e JDM saves the IP addresses that are visited to a settings file A JDM uninstall operation does not remove this settings file Ina Windows environment the settings file is dm xml and is created in the jdm folder under window user profile directory Ina UNIX environment the settings file is jdm dm xml Ina Linux environment the settings file is jdm dm xml e The dm xml file containing IP addresses visited from a previous JDM Installing the Device Manager software Device Manager software can be installed in Windows UNIX or Linux environment The following sections provide information on the system requirements and installation procedures to install Device Manager software in Windows UNIX and Linux environments e Installing JDM on Windows page 102 Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux page 110 Installing JOM on Windows This section includes the following topics Windows minimum requirements page 103 Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows page 103 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02
364. stem Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 318 Administering the switch using web based management Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 319 Configuring the switch using web based management The switch configuration options available to you are e Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings page 319 e Modifying system settings page 322 e Configuring switch port status page 324 e Configuring high speed flow control page 327 e Downloading switch images page 328 e Downloading ASCII configuration files page 330 Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server page 331 Enabling and disabling autosave page 333 e Configuring port communication speed page 334 e Configuring Rate Limiting page 335 Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings You can configure the BootP mode settings create and modify the In band switch IP addresses and In band subnet mask parameters and configure the IP address of your default gateway ATTENTION Settings take effect immediately when you click Submit To configure BootP IP and gateway settings use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt IP The IP page appears
365. stom Banner tab appears Edit Chassis dialog box Custom Banner tab 492 467 120 20 Chassis neren a a E om Heo End To create a Custom Banner use the following procedure Step Action 1 In the Banner tab click on the custom radio button and then click Apply 2 Click on the Custom Banner tab 3 In the Custom Banner tab make the changes to the lines of the banner that you want to create and click Apply The custom banner is 19 lines high and can be up to 80 characters long Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 272 Configuring the switch using Device Manager End Working with configuration files This chapter describes how you can view information and upload or download the configuration and image files FileSystem dialog box To open the Edit FileSystem dialog box use the following procedure From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt File System The FileSystem dialog box appears and displays the Config Image Diag tab Figure 94 FileSystem Config Image Diag File tab dialog box 192 167 120 28 FileSystem Config Image Diag file Ascii Config File License File Save Configuration LoadServerAddr 192 167 32 0 BinaryConfigFilename ImageFileName Juokka 410s imq ss tt ti 3OS i i FwFileName Diagnos
366. sts the DB 9 Console port connector pin assignments Table 154 DB 9 Console port connector pin assignments Pin number sima OOS S Signal ground GND e Pos SSS Request to send not used Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 342 Appendix A DB 9 RS 232 D Console Comm Port connector Pin number Signal 8 Not used 9 Ring indicator not used Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 343 Appendix B Default settings The following table lists the factory default settings for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Table 155 Factory default settings BootP Request Mode In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask Default setting BootP or Default IP 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Read Only Community String Read Write Community String Trap IP Address Community String Autotoplology Authentication Trap Link Up Down Trap Reset Count 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned public 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Zero length string Enabled Enabled Enabled 1 This is the value only when the flash memory is erased Even if you reboot the switch to factory defaults the Reset Count increases and is
367. t Multicast Broadcast or Both Limit Configure the threshold limit for the selected type of packet 2 On the Rate Limiting page type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 337 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to isolate and diagnose problems with your Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series and covers the following topics e Interpreting the LEDs page 337 Diagnosing and correcting problems page 337 Normal power up sequence Port connection problems Interpreting the LEDs For information on interpreting the LEDs for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series see LED display panel page 27 Diagnosing and correcting problems Before you execute the problem solving steps described in this section cycle the power to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord then verify that the switch follows the normal power up sequence WARNING To avoid injury from hazardous electrical current do not remove the top cover of the device There are no user serviceable components inside WARNING Vorsicht Um Verletzungsgefahr durch einen elektrischen Stromschlag auszuschlieBen nehmen Sie niemals die obere Abdeckung vom Ger t ab Im Ge
368. t both ends of the link Port connection problems are also traceable to the autonegotiation mode or the port interface Autonegotiation modes Port connection problems can occur when a port or station is connected to another port or station that is not operating in a compatible mode for example connecting a full duplex port on one station to a half duplex port on another station Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 340 Troubleshooting The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series negotiates port speeds according to the IEEE 802 3u autonegotiating standard The switch adjusts autonegotiates its port speed and duplex mode to match the best service provided by the connected station up to 100 Mb s in full duplex mode as follows e If the connected station uses a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802 3u autonegotiating standard the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series cannot negotiate a compatible mode for correct operation e If the autonegotiation feature is not present or not enabled at the connected station the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series may not be able to determine the correct duplex modes In both situations the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series autosenses the speed of the connected station and by default reverts to half duplex mode If the connect
369. t Type Power Source Present DC Power Status Choose the type of power detection you want for the switch e 802 3af e 802 3af and legacy The default is 802 3af ATTENTION Ensure that the power detection method you choose for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series matches that used by the IP devices you are powering This display only field displays the current power supply for the switch e AC Only using only the internal power source of the switch AC Power Status Displays the current status of AC power on the switch Displays the current status of DC power on the switch Not Present Type the information or make a selection from the list Click Submit End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 170 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR Displaying and configuring power management for the ports To configure power management settings for each port use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt PoE Management gt Port Property The Port Property page appears Port Property page page 170 Port Property page Configuration gt Power Management gt Port Property Port Power Setting Port Admin Status Current Classification Status e Detecting fi Wa v
370. t Unit 3 Stack cable 4 Stack cable Used for return Regardless of stack configuration the following applies When power is applied to the stack the base unit initializes typically within 60 seconds and the entire stack powers up as a single logical unit A RS 232 communications cable can be attached to the console port of any switch in the stack to establish a console connection A software upgrade can be performed on the stack from any switch using the console interface a Telnet session the web based management interface or any SNMP based management software The stack can be managed using a Telnet session web based management interface or any SNMP based management software through any stack switch port When stacking two or more switches use the 3 meters cascade max return cable part number AL2518003 E6 to complete the link from the last unit in the stack to the base unit Temporary base unit If an assigned base unit fails the next unit in the stack order automatically becomes the new temporary base unit This change is indicated by the Base LED on the temporary base unit LED display panel moving to a steady amber state Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 52 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking This automatic failover is only a temporary safeguard If the stac
371. t address associated with the remote system AddrlfSubtype Identifies the numbering method used to define the interface number associated with the remote system e unknown e iflndex e systemPortNumber Adarlfld The integer value used to identify the interface number of the management address component associated with the remote system AddrOID The value used to identify the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with the management address advertised by the remote system agent End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 299 Unknown TLV tab With the Unknown TLV tab you can view details about unknown TLVs received on the local system Use the following procedure to open the Unknown TLV tab Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu bar choose Edit gt Diagnostics gt 802 1ab gt LLDP The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed 2 Click the Unknown TLV tab The Unkown TLV tab appears own TLV tab eee eu tb ee te TEOSA 1 TeneMark Uninoentiviype Uninowntivinfo ra B The following table describes the Unknown TLV tab fields Table 136 Unknown TLV tab fields Field Description TimeMark The TimeFilter for this entry LocalPortNum Identifies the l
372. t needed disable al Specifies when to use BootP ways e default ip use BootP or the default IP e last use BootP or the last known address e disable never use BootP e always Always use BootP no ip bootp server command The no ip bootp server command disables the BootP server The syntax forthe no ip bootp server command is no ip bootp server The no ip bootp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no ip bootp server command has no parameters or values default ip bootp server command The default ip bootp server command sets the BootP server status to BootP or Default IP The syntax for the default ip bootp server command is default ip bootp server The default ip bootp server command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The default ip bootp server command has no parameters or values Setting TFTP parameters You can display the IP address of the TFTP server assign an IP address you want to use for a TFTP server copy a configuration file to the TFTP server or copy a configuration file from the TFTP server to the switch to use to configure the switch This section covers e show tftp server command page 198 e tftp server commana page 198 e default tftp server command page 199 no tftp server command page 199 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 Nove
373. t qos egressmap default ip netmask command page 179 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 default Ildp config notification command page 220 default Ildp status command page 223 default Ildp command page 219 default Ildp tx tlv commana page 222 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 default mac address table aging time command page 99 default name command page 236 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration Quality of Service NN47215 504 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 32
374. t saved across reboots Add the word no to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to clear or remove the parameters of the actual command For example when you enter the command ip address 192 32 154 126 you set the IP address However when you enter no ip address the system returns the IP address to zero See Appendix Command List page 353 for an alphabetical list of no commands Add the word default to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to set the parameters of the command to the factory default values See Appendix Command List page 353 for an alphabetical list of default commands When you enter a portion of the command and press the Tab key the system finds the first unambiguous match of a command and displays that command For example if you enter down Tab the system displays download Keystroke navigation You can change the location of the cursor using the key combinations shown in the following table Table 10 Keystroke navigation Key combination Ctrl A Start of line Ctrl B Back 1 character Ctrl C Abort command Ctrl D Delete the character indicated by the cursor Ctrl E End of line Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Basic navigation 89 Key combination Function Ctrl H Delete character left of cursor Backspace key Tab Com
375. t stack auto unit replacement enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode There are no parameters or variables for the default stack auto unit replacement enable command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Auto Unit Replacement 63 Configuring AUR using Device Manager You also can enable or disable AUR using Device Manager by toggling the AutoUnitReplacementEnabled field in the System tab see System tab page 259 Displaying unit stack uptime You can display the uptime for each unit in a stack Unit stack uptime collects the stack uptime for each unit in a stack and reports this information when requested You can determine how long each unit is connected to the stack You can use the show stack info uptime to display the unit uptimes The syntax for the show stack info uptime is show stack info uptime The show stack info uptime is executed in Privileged EXEC command mode and takes no parameters Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 64 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2
376. t using the CLI This chapter describes how to enable a port name a port and enable rate limiting This chapter covers the following topics Enabling or disabling a port page 233 Naming ports page 235 Setting port speed page 237 Enabling flow control page 240 Enabling rate limiting page 242 Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements CANA page 244 Enabling or disabling a port You can enable or disable a port using the CLI This section covers the following commands shutdown command for the port page 233 no shutdown command page 234 shutdown command for the port The shutdown port lt portlist gt command disables the port The syntax for the shutdown port lt portlist gt command is shutdown port lt portlist gt Table 91 shutdown port command parameters and variables page 234 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown line lt portlist gt command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 234 Ethernet port management using the CLI Table 91 shutdown port command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables p line lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to shut down or disable Enter the port numbers you want to disable ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses th
377. table describes the RX Stats tab fields Table 131 RX Stats tab fields Field Description PortNum Port number FramesDiscardedTotal The number of LLDP frames received on the port and discarded for any reason This counter provides an indication that LLDP header formatting problems exist with the local LLDP agent in the sending system or that LLDPDU validation problems exist with the local LLDP agent in the receiving system Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 290 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Field Description FramesErrors The number of invalid LLDP frames received on the port while the LLDP agent is enabled Frames Total The number of valid LLDP frames received on the port while the LLDP agent is enabled TLVsDiscardedTotal The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason TLVsUnrecognizedT otal The number of LLDP TLVs received on a given port that are not recognized by this LLDP agent on the indicated port An unrecognized TLV is referred to as the TLV whose type value is in the range of reserved TLV types 000 1001 111 1110 in Table 9 1 of IEEE 802 1AB 2004 An unrecognized TLV can be a basic management TLV from a later LLDP version AgeoutsTotal This counter represents the number of age outs that occurred on a given port An age out is the number
378. tal Ethernet power budget for the switch is exceeded the switch sheds load by shutting down power to ports You configure the Power over Ethernet PoE parameters on the PoE ports using the Command Line Interface CLI the web based management system or Device Manager JDM This chapter contains the following topics Diagnosing and correcting PoE problems page 158 e Configuring PoE switch parameters using the CLI page 158 e Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI page 160 e Displaying PoE configuration using the CLI page 164 e Configuring PoE using Web based management page 167 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 158 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR and 2550T PWR e Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager page 172 Diagnosing and correcting PoE problems This section discusses some common problems in using the PoE features of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 PWR This section discusses the following topics e Status codes on PoE ports page 158 Status codes on PoE ports You may see an error displayed for a port running PoE If these errors appear they are in the port status section of the PoE displays in the CLI and the web based management system The following are the messages that display and t
379. ted in tables associated with the lidpRemoteSystemsData objects and all LLDP extension objects associated with remote systems An NMS can use this object to reduce polling of the l dpRemoteSystemsData objects RemTablesInserts The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MSAP is inserted into tables contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData and IidpExtensions objects The complete set of information received from a particular MSAP is inserted into related tables If partial information cannot be inserted for a reason such as lack of resources all of the complete set of information is removed This counter is incremented only once after the complete set of information is successfully recorded in all related tables Any failures occurring during insertion of the information set which result in deletion of previously inserted information do not trigger any changes in IIdpStatsRemTablesinserts because the insert is not completed yet or in l dpStatsRemTablesDeletes because the deletion is only a partial deletion If the failure is the result of a lack of resources the IldpStatsRemTablesDrops counter is incremented once Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 285 Field Description RemTablesDeletes The number of times the c
380. tem Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Appendix B Default settings 347 Field Default setting Bridge Max Age Time 20 seconds Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds Participation Normal Learning Path Cost 10 or 100 Bridge Priority 0x0000 OxFO00 Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Forward Delay 15 seconds Bridge Maximum Age Time 15 seconds Bridge Priority 0x8000 Bridge Hello Time 20 seconds Bridge Max Age Time 20 seconds Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds Default Path Cost Type e 32 bits in MSTP RSTP mode e 16 bits in legacy STP mode e Not supported in STPG mode Path Cost 10 or 100 1 for Gigabit port Path Cost 1000 LAN speed in Mb s Bridge Priority 0x8000 Root Port Root Path Cost Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Forward Delay 15 seconds Bridge Max Age Time 20 seconds Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds Add VLAN membership 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 348 Appendix B Default settings Tenner ee Field Default setting Delete VLAN Membership Blank STP Group State Active for CIST InActive for MSTIs 2 to 7 Participation Normal Learning Path Cost 200000 20 000 for Gigabit port Path Cost 2 1010 Number of Kilobits link State Topology dependent Bridge
381. ters or variables Figure 67 show arp table command output page 202 displays a sample output of the show arp table command Figure 67 show arp table command output 2556T PWRH show arp table Port IP Address MAC Address 192 167 120 229 66 19 69 BG 48 60 48 192 167 120 1 00 0E 62 77 60 78 255 T PWR Displaying interfaces You can view the status of all interfaces on the switch including MultiLink Trunk membership link status autonegotiation and speed This section contains information about the following e show interfaces command page 202 e show interfaces config command page 204 show interfaces command The show interfaces command displays the current configuration and status of all interfaces The syntax for the show interfaces command is show interfaces names gbic info lt portlist gt The show interfaces command is executed in the User Exec command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Displaying interfaces 203 Table 67 show interfaces command parameters and variables page 203 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces command Table 67 show interfaces command parameters and variables Parameters and ee Description variables gbic info Displays gbic details LINE Displays the interface information for specific
382. the default speed command is default speed port lt portlist gt The default speed command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 97 default soeed command parameters and variables page 238 describes the parameters and variables for the default speed command Table 97 default speed command parameters and variables Parameters and aons Description variables port lt portlist gt Specifies the port numbers to set the speed to factory default Enter the port numbers you want to set ATTENTION If you omit this parameter the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Setting port speed 239 duplex command The duplex command specifies the duplex operation for a port The syntax for the duplex command is duplex port lt portlist gt full half auto The duplex command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 98 duplex command parameters and variables page 239 describes the parameters and variables for the duplex command Table 98 duplex command parameters and variables Parameters and Description variables P port lt portlist gt Specifies the port number to configure the duplex mode Enter the port number you want to configure or all to confi
383. thernet Routing Switch 2500 Series show lacp aggr lt 1 65535 gt Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show lacp debug member portlist Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series show lacp port lt portlist gt Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 366 Appendix D Command List Command show lacp stats port lt portlist gt show lacp system show Ildp local sys data mgmt sys data stats Page No Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 show Ildp command page 224 show Ildp port lt portlist gt neighbor neighbor mgmt addr rx stats tx stats tx tlv show logging config critical informational serious Sort reverse show Ildp port command page 226 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management System Monitoring NN47215 502 show mac address table vid lt 1 4094 gt
384. thernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hello time lt 1 10 gt max age lt 6 40 gt Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 pathcost type bits16 bits32 priority 0000 10 000 20000 E F0000 tx holdcount lt 1 10 gt version stp compatible rstp spanning tree rstp port lt portlist gt cost Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series lt 1 2000000005 edge port false true Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and learning disable enable p2p auto MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 force false force true priority 00 10 E FO protocol migration false true Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 372 Appendix D Command List Command Page No speed port lt portlist gt 10 100 1000 auto speed commana page 237 ssh Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ssh download auth key address lt KXX XXX XX Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series X XXX gt key name lt file gt Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ssh dsa auth Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 ssh dsa host key Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215
385. thernet Routing Switch 2500 Series has a unique 48 bit hardware address or MAC address that is printed on a label on the back panel You can use this MAC address when you configure the network BootP server to recognize the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series BootP requests A properly configured BootP server lets the switch automatically learn its assigned IP address subnet mask IP address of the default router default gateway and software image file name For more information and an example of a BootP configuration file see Appendix Sample BootP configuration file page 351 Choosing a BootP request mode The BootP Request Mode field in the IP Configuration window lets you choose which method the switch uses to broadcast BootP requests BootP or Default IP e BootP Always BootP Disabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Switch management features 71 BootP or Last Address ATTENTION Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests the BootP process eventually times out if a reply is not received When the process times out the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode To restart the BootP process change the BootP request mode to any of the three following modes BootP or Default IP e BootP Always e BootP or Last Address BootP or Default
386. tics P Sj dnldConfig C upldConfig Action C dnidImg C dnidimalfNewer dnidImgNoReset C dnidFw C dnldFwNoReset Status other Refresh Close Help Table 122 FileSystem Config Image Diag file dialog box fields page 272 describes the FileSystem Config Image Diag file dialog box fields Table 122 FileSystem Config Image Diag file dialog box fields Field Description LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the configuration file and or the image file If not used then the value is 0 0 0 0 BinaryConfigFileN Name of the configuration file currently associated with the ame interface When not used the value is a zero length string Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Working with configuration files 273 Field Description ImageFileName FwFileName Diagnostics Action Status Name of the image file s currently associated with the interface When the object is not used the value is a zero length string Specifies the FWFileName This object is used to download or upload a config file an image file or diag firmware file In read operation if there is no action taken since the boot up it returns with a value of other Otherwise it returns the latest action In a write operation the values that can be written
387. time period 1 to 60 minutes otherwise the switch performs a reset Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Basic navigation 95 When the shutdown command is initiated in the CLI the following message appears Shutdown y n Enter y at this prompt to shut down the switch The following warning message then appears Warning the switch stack has been set to reboot in lt xx gt minutes Current configuration has been saved no further configuration changes can be saved until reboot occurs or shutdown cancel command is issued The syntax for shutdown command is shutdown force minutes to wait lt 1 60 gt cancel Once the shutdown command is initiated all existing and subsequent Console Interface sessions display the following message Stack will reset in lt xxxx gt seconds While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message all subsequent CLI sessions display the following message The shutdown process is in progress It is safe to poweroff the stack Configuration changes will not be saved Shutdown has blocked the flash Autoreset in lt xxxx gt seconds ATTENTION You can disable switch ports that are trunk members if you choose to disable them one by one If you choose to disable all ports of the unit or stack the changes cannot have effect on the ports be
388. tion NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 178 System configuration using the CLI Assigning and clearing IP addresses Using the CLI you can assign IP addresses and Gateway addresses clear these addresses and view configured IP addresses This section contains information about the following topics e ip address command page 178 default ip address command page 179 e no ip address commana page 179 e default ip netmask command page 179 e no ip netmask command page 179 ip default gateway commana page 180 e no ip default gateway command page 180 e default ip default gateway command page 181 e show ip command page 181 ip address command The ip address command sets the IP address and subnet mask for the switch The syntax for the ip address command is ip address lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt netmask lt XXX XXX XXX XXX gt The ip address command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Table 47 ip address command parameters and variables page 178 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address command Table 47 ip address command parameters and variables Parameters and ae f Description variables XXX XXX XXX XXX Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation netmask is optional netmask Set the IP subnet mask for the switch ATTENTION When you change the IP address or subnet mask
389. tion of a single port use the following procedure Do one of the following e Double click on a single port e From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Port From the shortcut menu choose Edit e From the toolbar click Edit a ATTENTION When you edit a single port tabs that are not applicable are not available for you to select When you edit multiple ports some tabs are not available and some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable When the option does not apply for a given port NoSuchObject is displayed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 304 Configuring ports using Device Manager The following sections provide a description of the Edit Port dialog box and details about the fields in the Interface tab e Interface tab for a single port page 304 Interface tab for multiple ports page 308 Interface tab for a single port The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of a single port To view the Interface tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the port you want to edit 2 Do one of the following e Double click on the selected port e From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Port From the shortcut menu choose Edit From the toolbar click Edit The Port dialog box for a
390. tor version 4 51 or later on Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP Windows Vista and UNIX e IP address of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series ATTENTION The Web pages of the web based management interface may load at different speeds depending on the Web browser you use In order to use the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series web based management functionality such as downloading software you must connect your TFTP server to an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series For instructions to set the IP address of the switch see ip address command page 178 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 146 Using the Web based management interface Access to the Web management interface for the switch is enabled by default You can configure access to the interface using the CLI For information about enabling Web access see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Logging in to the web based management interface Before you log in to the web based management interface use the CLI to verify the VLAN port assignments and to ensure that your switch CPU and computer are assigned to the same VLAN If the devices are not connected to the same VLAN the IP address cannot display the home page To log in to the web ba
391. ts configuration and the nonvolatile log to flash memory Also the system automatically saves the configuration file if a system reset command is invoked by the user ATTENTION Do not power off the switch within 60 seconds of changing any configuration parameters Doing so causes loss of changes in the configuration parameters You can enable or disable the autosave feature using the autosave enable and no autosave enable commands You can use the CLI command copy config nvram to force a manual save of the configuration when the autosave feature is disabled Using SNTP The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP feature synchronizes the Universal Coordinated Time UTC to an accuracy within 1 second This feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 MIB is the sSagent With this feature the system can obtain the time from any RFC 2030 compliant NTP SNTP server ATTENTION If you have trouble using this feature try other NTP servers Some NTP servers can be overloaded or currently inoperable The system attempts to connect to the NTP server at least three times with five minutes duration between each retry If the connection fails after three attempts the system waits for the next synchronization time the default is 24 hours and begins the process again The SNTP provides a real time timestamp for the software shown as Greenwich Mean Time GMT If the SNTP is enabled the default value is disabled the system synchronizes wit
392. tus command parameters and variables Parameters and sas Description variables port lt portlist gt Specifies the ports affected by the command rxOnly Enables LLDPU receive only txAndRx Enables LLDPU transmit and receive txOnly Enables LLDPU transmit only no Ildp status command The no 1lldp status command disables 802 1ab on ports The syntax forthe no 1ldp status command is no lldp port lt portlist gt status The no 1ldp status command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Table 85 no lldp status command parameters and variables page 223 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp status command Table 85 no Ildp status command parameters and variables Parameters and ar Description variables Specifies the ports affected by the command default Ildp status command The default 1ldp status command sets the LLDPU transmit and receive status on specified ports to its default value txAndRx The syntax for the default lldp status command is default lldp port lt portlist gt status The default lldp status command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 224 System configuration using the CLI Table 86 default Ildp status command parameters and variables page 224 descri
393. twork The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 66 System configuration software features GUI lets you configure monitor and maintain your network through Web browsers You can also download software using the Web For information about web based management see Using the Web based management interface page 145 e Any generic SNMP based network management software You can use any generic SNMP based network management software to configure and manage an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Console port settings The efault settings for the Console port are e 9600 baud with eight data bits e One stop bit e No parity as the communications format e Flow control set to disabled Switch banner When you connect to the switch through the Console port or through a Telnet connection you are presented with a Nortel switch banner Enter Ctrl Y to proceed to the CLI interface Figure 20 Login banner et HEH HU NUNNHHHRHH HNHNHHRHHHHHN HENHEHHHHHH HEH siti HHH BANNER HHRHAE HHRNHHRHEHHH HHNRRRHHRRHNH Renn HHH nunun nun nnn nun nnn nun nun nun nun HH nun ang nun nnn nun He nuR ttt Ht Hi HRH it Hh HERREEEHEHH nut ea nut unu nun nun nan NNN HNNNNNNHEHH nun nunnnuNHN nan nan HHH HHH nun nun nun nun nut Ht att hanne nat aint tit ttt nut nut nut nun NUUN NANNNNHNNHHEN HUN nun nun NNRRNNHNNNN B
394. tworks linking with Gigabit Ethernet ports 26 File System window 272 FileSystem dialog box 272 flash memory for software image upgrades 72 flow control 240 flowcontrol command 240 format 85 177 forwarding table 98 FwFileName field 273 G gateway 178 gateway addresses configuring 319 Gateway Setting field 322 GBIC 26 General CLI commands 177 Gigabit Ethernet 240 Gigabit Ethernet ports linking with fiber optic networks 26 Global Power Management page 168 Globals tab 253 graph creating 138 modifying 139 Graph command 132 graph dialog box 139 Graph menu 127 Graph Selected button 128 138 graph types 135 H hardware description 152 help 87 88 Help button 128 help command 89 Help menu 127 Help Device Manager 143 high 162 High Speed Flow Control page 327 high speed flow control configuring 327 Horizontal button 140 hybrid mode 85 icons about 150 Identify Unit Numbers page 155 IEEE 802 3u standard 77 image file 272 ImageFileName field 266 273 274 ImageLoadMode field 261 Index field 306 309 Insert button 133 installing the Device Manager software 102 interface command 91 Interface item ARP 255 Interface tab for a single port 304 Interface tab for multiple ports 308 interfaces 91 internal power source 169 IP 177 IP address 178 178 ip address command 178 IP Address field 152 IP addresses configuring 319 ip bootp server command 196 ip default gateway command 180 IP dialog
395. unk to which the port is assigned if any IsPortShared Specifies whether a port is shared Multiple ports that are logically represented as a single port are shared Only one shared port may be active at a time PortActiveComponent Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared port e Viewing and editing multiple port configurations page 307 Interface tab for multiple ports page 308 Viewing and editing multiple port configurations To view or edit the configurations of multiple ports Step Action 1 Select the ports you want to edit Press Ctrl left click the ports you want to view or configure A yellow outline appears around the selected ports 2 Do one of the following From the shortcut menu choose Edit From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Port From the shortcut menu choose Edit From the toolbar click Edit Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 308 Configuring ports using Device Manager ATTENTION When you edit multiple ports some tabs are not available and some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable When the option does not apply for a given port NoSuchObject is displayed End Interface tab for multiple ports The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of the s
396. unknames enable disable member lt portlist gt learning disable fast norm al bpdu all ports single port name port lt portlist gt lt LINE gt no auto pvid Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 name commana page 235 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 no auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt no autosave enable no auto negotiation advertisements command page 247 no autosave enable command page 207 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 360 Appendix D Command List Command no autotopology Page No no autotopology command page 216 no banner no banner c
397. uplex settings you can manually configure the settings for the link in question End e Interface tab fields page 305 Interface tab fields Table 138 Interface tab fields for a single port page 306 describes the Interface tab fields for a single port Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 306 Configuring ports using Device Manager Table 138 Interface tab fields for a single port Field Description A unique value assigned to each interface The value ranges between 1 and 512 Name Specifies a name for the port Mtu The size of the largest packet in octets that can be sent or received on the interface PhysAddress The MAC address assigned to a particular interface AdminStatus The current administrative state of the device which can be one of the following e up down When a managed system is initialized all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the up state AdminStatus changes to the down state or remains in the up state as a result of either management action or the configuration information available to the managed system OperStatus The current operational state of the interface which can be one of the following up e down e testing If AdminStatus is up then OperStatus should be up if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffi
398. uration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 177 System configuration using the CLI In the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series the Command Line Interface CLI commands lets you display and modify the switch configuration while the switch is operating This chapter includes information about general switch maintenance such as setting up access parameters upgrading the software and setting the speed This chapter contains information about the following topics Configuring the switch IP address subnet mask and default gateway page 177 Using DNS to ping and telnet page 184 Configuration Management page 188 Customizing your system page 193 Displaying the ARP table page 202 Displaying interfaces page 202 Saving the configuration to NVRAM page 205 Enabling and disabling autosave page 206 Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol page 208 Enabling Autopology page 215 Configuring LLDP using the CLI page 217 Configuring LEDs to blink on the display panel page 229 Upgrading software page 229 Configuring the switch IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP notation To enter IP addresses and subnet masks in the CLI enter both the IP address and the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation XXX XXX XXX XXX Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configura
399. uration Management feature lets you store and retrieve the configuration parameters of an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to a TFTP server This feature supports two different methods for managing system configuration files e Binary configuration file management e ASCII configuration file management Requirements The following requirements apply to the Configuration file feature e The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches e A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch Table 8 Parameters not saved to the configuration file page 73 describes configuration file parameter information Table 8 Parameters not saved to the configuration file These parameters are not saved In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask Default Gateway Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Terminal settings speed width length Binary configuration file You can store the configuration parameters of a switch to a TFTP server and retrieve the stored parameters to automatically configure a replacement switch Certain requirements apply when automatically configuring a switch using this feature see Requirements page 73 You can set up the file on your TFTP server and set the filena
400. used as a workgroup switch Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T Up to 48 desktop users IP Phones Desktop users Secure Router Secure 1000 Router Wireless LAN Key 1000 Access Point 10 Mb s 100 Mb s eee 1000 Mb s Medium sized office wiring closet switch application Figure 10 Configuring power workgroups and a wiring closet switch page 37 shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series used as a wiring closet switch in a medium to large enterprise office environment Desktop workstations IP Phones and WLAN APs are connected directly to the switch ports Figure 10 Configuring power workgroups and a wiring closet switch page 37 shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 1600 series used as a backbone switch connecting to Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 S1 with an optional 1O0OOBASE SX SFP GBIC for maximum bandwidth S2 is a single virtual switch stack of three ERS 2500 switches providing 10 or 100Mb s also connecting to the ERS 1624G backbone switch with an optional 1OOOBASE SX SFP GBIC in both switches Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Network configuration examples 37 Figure 10 Configuring power workgroups and a wiring closet switch Ethernet Routing Switch 1624G Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T PWR S1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 S
401. utotopology nmm table command 217 show autotopology settings command 216 UNIX installation of Device Manager 111show banner command 201 Windows installation of Device Manager 103 reset 315 Reset Changes button 133 Reset page 315 Reset to Defaults page 316 316 resetting the switch 315 show cli command 194 show clock summer time command 215 show clock time zone command 214 show config network command 190 show interfaces command 202 show interfaces config command 204 show ip address command 182 resetting the switch to system defaults 316show ip command 181 restore factory default command 184 Retry Count field 121 RFC 79 Rmon menu 127 RPSU 168 S save config command 206 Save SNMPv3 Devices to Open Last 123 scripts 81 91 91 SecondaryServer Address field 277 SecondaryServer SynchFailures field 277 Secure Shell 140 security configuring passwords 314 Segld field 281 Serial Number field 152 serial port 86 Sernum field 250 SerNum field 260 262 265 setting usernames and passwords 87 settings default 343 SFP GBIC 26 SFP GBIC Support 26 shortcut menus port 132 switch unit 131 show arp table command 202 show auto negotiation advertisements command 245 show auto negotiation capabilities command 245 show autosave command 206 show ip dns command 185 show Ildp command 224 show Ildp port command 226 show mac address table command 98 show poe main status command 164 show poe port status command 165 show poe powe
402. values Then if the unit is a standalone ERS 2500 switch ensure that a valid stacking license dat file is installed on the switch and the rear ports are operating in Stacking Mode If the unit is a Stack Enabled ERS 2500 switch then the unit is ready for adding or replacing For information on installing a stacking license see Standalone configuration with license files page 40 3 Download the configuration file to the new unit Manually insert the new unit in the stack Turn off the new unit inserted into the stack and manually replace the failed unit in the stack Plug in the stack cables into the appropriate cascade ports 4 Power up the new unit in the stack The new unit joins the stack and the configuration of the failed unit is replicated onto it Once the replication is completed the new unit is reset and rejoins the stack automatically End If the base unit is being replaced remember that the stack elected a temporary base unit The new unit cannot automatically resume operation as the base unit even with the Unit Select switch set to Base To restore the stack to its original running state with the new unit set to Base using the Unit Select switch the switch stack must be reset Auto Unit Replacement The Auto Unit Replacement AUR feature enables users to replace a unit from a stack while retaining the configuration of the unit This feature requires the stack power to be on during the unit replacement The
403. vertisements commana page 247 show auto negotiation advertisements command The show auto negotiation advertisements command displays the current autonegotiation advertisements The syntax for the show auto negotiation advertisements command is show auto negotiation advertisements port lt portlist gt The show auto negotiation advertisements command is executed in the User Exec command mode Table 104 show auto negotiation advertisements command page 245 describes the parameters and variables for the show auto negotiation advertisements command Table 104 show auto negotiation advertisements command Parameters and values Description port lt portlist gt Enter ports for which you want the current autonegotiation advertisements displayed Figure 89 show auto negotiation advertisements command output page 245 displays sample output from the show auto negotiation advertisements command Figure 89 show auto negotiation advertisements command output 2526T lt config if gt t show auto negotiation advertisements port 2 4 8 Port Autonegotiation Advertised Capabilities 1 Full 1 Half 1 Full 16 Half 4 1 Full 1 Half 1 Full 1 Half 1 Full 1 Half 1 Full 1 Half 2526T lt conf ig if gt show auto negotiation capabilities command The show auto negotiation capabilities command displays the hardware advertisement capabilities for the switch The syntax for the show auto negotiation capabilities command is
404. ves a BootP reply containing an in band IP address If the switch does not receive a BooiP reply that contains an in band IP address within 10 minutes the switch uses the last in band IP address it received from a BootP server This IP information is displayed in the Last BootP column If the IP address specified as the in band IP address is not currently in use these actions take effect immediately If an IP address is currently in use these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled Default BootP setting With Release 4 1 software the default operational mode for BootP on the switch is BootP or Default IP The switch requests an IP address from BootP only if one is not already set from the console terminal or if the IP address is the default IP address 192 168 1 1 Flash memory storage Switch software image storage The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series uses flash memory to store the switch software image The flash memory lets you update the software image with a newer version without changing the switch hardware see Upgrading software page 229 An in band connection between the switch and the TFTP load host is required to download the software image Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Switch management features 73 Configuration File Download Upload The Config
405. vice software CD as a self extracting executable file and is also available from the Nortel web site This chapter provides instructions for installing the JDM software in a Windows UNIX or Linux environment The Java Runtime Environment JRE is bundled with the JDM software and does not require a separate installation For details on installing Device Manager see the following sections e JDM installation precautions page 102 Installing the Device Manager software page 102 Installing JDM on Windows page 102 e Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux page 110 Starting Device Manager page 119 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 102 Getting Started with Device Manager JDM installation precautions The following warnings apply to Device Manager on all operating environments e The JDM and Ethernet Routing Switch software versions must match for the correct dialog boxes and information to be shown and accessible Please see the Release Notes for a complete compatibility list e If you want to use JDM to support multiple Nortel switches in your network ensure that the JDM version you use supports each version of software running on each Nortel device in your network e Prior to upgrading JDM either uninstall your previous version of the Device Manager software or in
406. view information about a GBIC port use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the GBIC 2 Choose Edit gt Port End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 130 Getting Started with Device Manager The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed The Interface tab describes the GBIC installed in the switch Figure 35 Interface tab 192 167 120 28 Port 1 7 Interface yLan 5TG EAPOL EAPOL Advance LACP ADAC Index 7 Name Descr Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T Module Port 7 Type ethernet csmacd Mtu 1514 PhysAddress 00 19 69 af c8 00 AdminStatus up down OperStatus down LastChange 2 days 02h 51m 06s LinkTrap enabled C disabled JV AutoNegotiate AdminDuplex half Full OperDuplex Full AdminSpeed C mbpsiO mbpsi00 C mbpsi000 mbpsio000 OperSpeed 100 mbps AutoNegotiationCapability 10Half 10Full 100HalF 100Full V 10HalF IV 10Full IV 100HalF AutoNegotiationadvertisements V 100Full J 1000HalF J 1000Full PauseFrame I AsymmPauseFrame MitId 0 IsPortShared portNotShared PortActiveComponent fixedPort LEDs and ports The color of LEDs in the device view is the same as the colors of the LEDs on the physical switch However the device view does not show blinking activity o
407. ware on UNIX or Linux An install screen appears followed by a Nortel dialog box When the InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears you are ready to begin the JDM installation Figure 29 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box Java Device Manager Introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of Java Device Manager It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen If you want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel button InstallAnywhere by Zero G_ ____ Cancel i Frevo H Next Step Action 1 Click Next the installation process The License Agreement dialog box appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 114 Getting Started with Device Manager License Agreement dialog box Java Device Manager License Agreement Installation and Use of Java Device Manager Requires Acceptance of the Following Ag Nortel Inc Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement License 7 na Agreement is between you the end user installing CCustomer and Nortel Corporation and its mail commie subsidiaries and
408. web server enable disable write memory Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and MultiLink Trunking NN47215 501 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security Configuration and Management NN47215 505 write memory commana page 205 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 374 Appendix D Command List Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 375 Appendix E Technical specifications This appendix provides technical specifications for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Environmental specifications The following table lists environmental specifications for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Table 157 Environmental specifications Parameter Operating specification Storage specification Temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Humidity 10 to 85 maximum relative 5 to 95 maximum relative humidity noncondensing humidity noncondensing Altitude 3024 m 10 000 ft 3024 m 10 000 ft AC power specifications The following table describes the AC power specifications for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Table 158 AC power
409. wer over Ethernet PoE 167 Power Pair field 169 power pairs 158 168 power port priority 160 162 power priority 176 Power Source Present field 169 power statistics 167 Power Supply tab 267 267 Power tab 175 power traps 160 power usage 158 164 power usage traps 174 power use 159 164 power sharing options 168 power up sequence 338 PowerDeviceDetectType field 174 PowerPriority field 176 PrimaryServer Address field 277 PrimaryServer SynchFailures field 277 Print button 133 Privacy Password 125 Privacy Protocol 125 product support 20 Properties dialog box 120 Hotswap Poll Interval field 122 Status Poll Interval field 122 publications related 79 Q QoS 127 Quick Start 312 Quick Start page 313 quit 90 R Rate Limit tab 250 Rate Limiting 335 Rate Limiting Configuration 79 Rate Limiting page 335 rate limit command 243 Read Community field 124 Read Community SNMP 125 Read Community SNMP field 124 Read Write All access 125 133 rear ports mode 46 ReasmMaxSize field 255 ReasmTimeout field 254 reboot 315 ReBoot field 260 Refresh Device Status button 128 release notes obtaining 147 reload command 93 RelPos 262 request mode choosing 70 requirements 86 accessing the CLI 86 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 19 November 2007 386 Index Device Manager 101 power cords terminal 86 show a
410. x use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 Do one of the following From the Device Manager main menu choose Edit gt Chassis End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Editing the chassis configuration 259 The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit gt Chassis dialog box and details about each field on the tab System tab page 259 e Base Unit Info tab page 261 e Agent tab page 265 e PowerSupply tab page 267 e Fan tab page 268 e Banner tab page 269 e Custom Banner tab page 271 System tab You can use the System tab to specify tracking information for a device device descriptions and so on To open the System tab use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select the chassis 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit gt Chassis The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed Edit Chassis dialog box System tab MAU AL 2 Es Syan base Lat Info Agent SOP Trap scanere Powertceehy Pan Barnas Custam Banner ADAC ADAC MAC Ranges Stack Montor moer Cthernet Routing Seti INT WGA PLACIS TWiwt 10 08 WES O Noriai titaria propie 1 dey 110m 908 Syn 1261 4 End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Confi
411. xes type the appropriate community strings ATTENTION To gain read write access to a device in Device Manager you must enter the read write community string for both the Read Community and Write Community strings 4 Click Open Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 126 Getting Started with Device Manager Device Manager automatically determines what version of software the selected device is running and displays the appropriate Device Manager dialog boxes The Device Manager window appears showing a picture of the device that represents the physical features of the device Device view Device Manager 609b06 192 167 120 29 Device Edit Graph VLAN QoS Rmon Actions Help STOIC TCO paul las yea N RTEL 2550T PWR 5 Speed tS WS YF B 2 oe 25 27 29 31 33 35 3F 39 4 OOO A UPS inksAct Down ft MODE Sed pRinRBiBhhif sz TI III IE IE standin S a Base ee e E Stacking Down Up Console Ststys Pwr 0 12 CE e 18 20 2 End Device Manager window The Device Manager window has the following parts e Menu bar e Toolbar e Device view e Status bar Figure 33 Parts of the Device Manager window Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007
412. you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring the switch IP address subnet mask and default gateway 179 default ip address command The default ip address command sets the IP address for the specified unit to the default value as 192 168 1 1 for Standalone Mode and 192 168 1 2 for Stacking Mode The syntax forthe default ip address command is default ip address The default ip address command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode no ip address command The no ip address command clears the IP address and subnet mask This command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a switch to all zeros 0 The syntax for the no ip address command is no ip address The no ip address command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The no ip address command has no parameters or variables ATTENTION When you change the IP address or subnet mask you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web You also disable any new Telnet connection and you must connect to the serial Console port to configure a new IP address default ip netmask command The default ip netmask command sets the subnet mask to the default value 255 255 255 0 The syntax for the default ip netmask command is default ip netmask The default
413. yright 2007 Nortel Networks 34 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware WARNING Avvertenza Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione l unico sistema per spegnere il dispositivo Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posizione che permetta l accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza Ay Be BEI FERUNTCEN T0744 20088 9 0R OFECT BHI KERAORS ARN RSH BAICBEL CCE RD Network configuration examples This section provides network configuration examples using the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series switches In these examples traffic Quality of service QoS feature can be used to prioritize the traffic of the network to ensure uninterrupted traffic of critical applications The examples are e Small office desktop switch application page 34 e Branch office workgroup switch application page 35 e Medium sized office wiring closet switch application page 36 Small office desktop switch application Figure 8 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a desktop switch page 35 shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a desktop switch in a small office environment The desktop workstations and servers are connected directly to the switch ports Alternatively an ERS 2500 series switch that supports Power over Ethernet PoE can provide connectivity and power to Wireless LAN Access Points WLAN APs in addition to desktop workstations and servers Nortel Ethernet Routin
414. ystem logging and network monitoring and how to display system statistics for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration IP Multicast NN47215 503 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Overview System Configuration NN47215 500 323162 B 02 02 Standard 4 1 19 November 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks 20 Introduction Describes how to configure IP Multicast Routing Protocol features for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 How to get help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting help from the Nortel web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site www nortel com support This site provides quick access to software documentation bulletins and tools to address issues with Nortel products More specifically the site enables you to e download software documentation and product bulletins e search the Technical Support web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment open and manage technical support cases Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor

Husqvarna 500RTT Tiller User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents